Home

2014 Nissan Titan

1. SSS NA wn oz boy Q Wwe 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 WDI0630 0 8 Illustrated table of contents 1 Battery P 8 14 2 Fuse fusible link box P 8 22 3 Transmission dipstick P 8 11 4 Engine oil filler cap P 8 9 5 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 13 6 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 13 7 Air cleaner P 8 18 8 Drive belt location P 8 16 9 Radiator cap P 8 7 10 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 12 11 Engine oil dipstick P 8 9 12 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Anti lock Braking Sys tem ABS warning light Automatic transmis sion check warning light Automatic transmis Sion park warning light 23z2y model Brake warning light Charge warning light pe 2 15 Engine oil pressure 2 15 low engine coolant temperature high warning light Warning light f Indicator light 4WD warning light EXz model Low fuel warning light 2 16 Low tire pressure 2 16 warning light Master warning light 2 18 if so equipped Seat belt warning light 2 18 and chime Supplemental air bag 2 19 warning light Electronic locking rear 2 18 differential E Lock System on indicator light
2. cece eee eee 4 85 Using the system m ead 4 85 Controlb ttons s sieese eae voa ux Er e PPPRER 4 88 Getting Started 2 co kpnokee e pep eRES E 4 88 List of voice commands sssessesssse 4 90 Voice Adaptation VA mode sssseseue 4 94 Manual control lee Lr RIA RR 4 95 Troubleshooting guide cc cece eee 4 97 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System without Navigation System Type B if so equipped 4 98 Regulatory Information cee e eee 4 99 Using the system siecnetete ttem rer pne ths 4 100 Control buttons ios see grace basse 4 101 Connecting procedure slssseesesue 4 101 Voice commands sie seei 6 cece ee mne 4 102 Making a Call cs 22 ctor eI seedings etes 4 104 Receiving a call enc errem remis 4 104 D ringa call odere dere deserit 4 105 Ending call 223 ente au ru dee metto es 4 105 Text messaging uera tee ee Aas wae 4 105 Bluetooth settings 4 107 Manual control 2 22 reti etnies 4 109 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System if so equipped 4 109 Regulatory Information eee eee 4 111 Moice commands eee mto mtr 4 111 Connecting procedure 2 20000 4 112 Vehicle phonebook 0c cece eee eee 4 113 Making a call 2 rre t rape TR tase Red 4 114 Receiving a call 2 sere ele n EIAS 4 114 During a call eee nee ae ae bi eue Rer E
3. AWARNING above 158 F 70 C e The Mobile Entertainment System is To avoid discharging the vehicle battery do not designed for rear seat passenger view operate the system more than 15 minutes without ing only starting the engine e The driver must not attempt to operate the Mobile Entertainment System while the vehicle is in motion so that full at tention may be given to vehicle operation Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 73 rower MODE 5 LHA0316 EJECT button DIGITAL VIDEO DISC DVD PLAYER DVD slot CONTROLS ENTER button POWER on off button MODE button Input jacks STOP button Refer to Playing a digital video disc DVD in this section for the function of each button PLAY PAUSE button LHA0317 MENU button 1 POWER button DISPLAY button 2 STOP button NAVIGATION keys 3 NEXT TRACK CHAPTER and PREVI OUS TRACK CHAPTER button 4 TITLE button 5 ENTER button ON 0 9 PO NM O 4 74 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 6 DISPLAY button A CAUTION 7 MODE button 8 SUBTITLE button 9 AUDIO button 10 ANGLE button 11 CLEAR button 12 PAUSE button 13 PLAY button 14 FAST FORWARD FAST RE VERSE button 15 MENU button 16 NAVIGATION keys 17 BACK button 18 Numeric keypad REMOTE CONTROL Refer to Playing a digital video disc DVD in this section for the function of each butto
4. SIC2745 Type A HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting When turning the switch to the DE posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on When turning the switch to the 2 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on 2 30 Instruments and controls WIC1250 Type B Type C A CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery SIC3019 WIC1251 Autolight system if so equipped The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on fora period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 1 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off Initially if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for a period of time If another door is opened while the headlights are on then the timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switc
5. For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Automatic transmission P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Parking brake Check the parking brake opera
6. Head restraint Adjustment notches Lock knob Stalks Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant s ears Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 4 4 4 LRS0888 LRS0889 LRS0890 To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push Removal the head restraint down Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seating position 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0891 SPA1025 Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down 3 Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position Front seat Active Head Restraints The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collisio
7. To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator or coolant reser voir cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the illumination of the engine oil pressure engine coolant temperature high indicator light or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to P Park Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood A WARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or
8. WRS0698 Forward facing step 8 8 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the re straint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 9 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 8 9 PY OFF Forward facing step 10 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light 4 should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section Move the child restraint to another seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 39 WRS0256 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
9. Do not rapidly apply the brakes Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not over react 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING A WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differ
10. Reading a received text message 1 Press the l button 2 Say Read Text The text message sender and delivery time are shown on the screen Use the tuning switch on the steering wheel to scroll through all text mes sages if more than one are available Press the button to exit the text message screen Press the amp button to access the following options for replying to the text message Call Back Speak this command to call the sender of the text message using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System e Send Text Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message Read Text Speak this command to read the text mes sage again Previous Text Speak this command to move to the previ ous text message if available Next Text Speak this command to move to the next text message if available NOTE Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph Bluetooth Bass Treble Balance Fade LHA2257 BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To access and adjust the settings for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System 1 Press the SETTING button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 107 Setting Bluetooth Bluetooth Add phone or Device Delete Phone or Device Replace phone Select phone or Device LHA2274 Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to select Bluetooth and then press the ENTER
11. The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am bient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO When driving on rough roads Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions When the vehicle is stuck Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential E Lock system if so equipped Turn the switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle If it is difficult to free the vehicle rock the vehicle back and forth between reverse and drive gears If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud place stones or wooden blocks under the tires Then try the recovery procedures above Tire chains may be effective A CAUTION Do not spin the tires excessively Tires will sink deep into the mud making it difficult to free the vehicle Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction LSD0145 4WD shift switch operations e Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the 2WD 4H or 4LO position depending on driving conditions If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn accelerating or decelerating or if the key switch is turned off while in the 4H or
12. blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated Malfunction Indicator Light MIL If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank After a few driving trips the C3 light should turn off if no other potential emission control System malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected Check the fuel filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display If the fuel filler cap is loo
13. thumbs down is given after the skip limit has been reached the current track will continue to play but the feedback will be saved Models with Navigation System To switch to the Pandora audio mode press the AUX button repeatedly until the Pandora audio mode is displayed on the screen The controls for the Pandora audio are dis played on the screen Touch the keys on the Screen to play or pause the audio Touch the key to select thumbs up or the key to select thumbs down NOTE There is a limit of six skips per station per hour If a 9 thumbs down is given after the skip limit has been reached the current track will continue to play but the feedback will be saved 4 70 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Station List Bookmark Delete Station LHA2270 Pandora audio settings models with Navigation System only To adjust the Pandora audio settings select the Menu key Station List Select to display a list of available Pandora stations Bookmark Select to bookmark the current station Delete Station Select to remove the current station LHA0049 CD CARE AND CLEANING Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the disc Never touch the surface of the disc Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge usin
14. 7 If you have any questions or are having diffi culty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 2 60 Instruments and controls PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS Canadian radio frequency laws require transmit ter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during training Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to tim eout in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Training procedures replace Programming HomeLink Step 2 with the fol lowing NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components 1 See Programing HomeLink step 1 earlier in this section 2 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button During train ing your hand held transmitter may auto matically stop transmitting Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitter every two sec onds until the frequency signal has been learned The HomeLink indi
15. During this step do not place the ignition Switch in any position other than ON 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected positions are stored in the selected memory 1 or 2 If a new memory is stored in the same memory Switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position memory switch 1 or 2 with the follow ing procedure 1 Follow the steps for storing a memory posi tion 2 While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds press the a button on the keyfob The indicator light will blink After the indica tor light goes off the keyfob is linked to that memory setting With the key removed from the ignition switch press the M button on the keyfob The driv er s seat accelerator and brake pedals and out side mirrors will move to the memorized position NOTE If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch the keyfob automatically re links Confirming memory storage Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 seconds Wh
16. NOTE Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph POls powered Information by Google Google Weather amp Sond To Car Voice Settings LHA2253 fk SETTINGS B Bluetooth ee XM Bluetooth LHA2248 BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To access the phone settings 1 Press the MENU button 2 Select the Settings key 3 Select the Phone amp Bluetooth key Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 117 BLUETOOTH SETUP Phone Settings Connect New Device Select Connected Device Replace Connected Device Delete Connected Device LHA2265 Phone Settings See Phone settings in this section for more information Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth device to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Bluetooth Select to toggle the Bluetooth on and off 4 118 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems E PHONE
17. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system e Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system e Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor pressure sensor 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air b
18. Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER ATE THE EQUIPMENT WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH LICO474 LICO965 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down t
19. 2 58 Instruments and controls HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems s powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming When the HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver is programmed retain the original transmitter for future programming proce dures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section A WARNING Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door
20. 8 18 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation 4 20 4 28 Air conditioner service 4 34 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 9 7 Heater and air conditioner controls 4 17 4 25 4 32 Servicing air conditioner 4 34 Air flow charts ss 4 21 4 29 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 25 Anchor point locations 1 30 Antena x cts eG we ea Foe ed 4 72 Anti lock brake warning light 2 13 2 14 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 33 Audible reminders iss 2 20 Audiosystem sese 4 34 Bluetooth audio 4 66 4 68 Compact disc CD player 4 45 4 50 4 56 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player 3 2 sank acero eed 4 43 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player 2 2 eee 4 48 4 53 Audio System iPod Player vc eeu a 4 62 4 64 Audio system Radio gt ies estes RERO EE 4 34 USB interface 4 59 4 60 Autolight switch 6 2 sess 2 31 Automatic Automatic drive positioner 3 25 Automatic power window switch 2 52 Automatic transmission position indicator HONE Rc E 2 24 Driving with automatic transmission 5 14 Transmission shift selector lock release 5 19 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 16 Automatic door locks sss 3 6 Automatic transmission fl
21. Clock Mode Select the mode for the clock Auto uses the system s GPS to automatically maintain the time Manual allows you to set the clock using the Set Clock Manually key Time Zone maintains the time based upon the zone selected when selecting the Time Zone key SET CLOCK LHA2251 LHA2252 Set Clock Manually When this setting is activated the clock can be set manually Touch the or keys to adjust the hours minutes day month and year up or down Clock Mode must be set to Manual for this option to be available Daylight Savings Time When this setting is activated daylight savings time is on Touch the Daylight Savings Time key to toggle the setting on or off Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list 4 10 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Language Select the Language key to adjust the language used by the system The language can be set to English Francais or Espa ol Touchscreen click Select the Touchscreen Click key to toggle the touchscreen click feature on or off When acti vated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched System Beeps Select the System Beeps key to toggle the system beep tones feature on or off When acti vated a beep sound will be heard when a pop up message appears on the screen or a button on the unit such as the lt D button is pressed an
22. For quick cooling when the outside tem perature is high push the CS button to the ON position The indicator light on the gt button will come on amp will appear on the display if so equipped Be sure to return the amp P to the OFF position for normal cooling The indicator light on the CSP button will go off gt will ap pear on the display if so equipped You may also select MAX A C for quick cooling Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air 1 Push the E gt button to the OFF position The indicator light on the gt button will go off amp gt will appear on the display if so equipped 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the e position 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Push the A C button on The indicator light onthe A C button will come on A C will appear on the display if so equipped 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position 4 28 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Operating tips Keep the windows closed while the air con ditioner is in operation After parking in the sun drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment Then close the windows This allows the air con ditioner to cool the interior more quickly The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps pre v
23. In case of emergency 6 11 For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual 6 12 In case of emergency ACE1019 TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN Two wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving rear wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated A CAUTION Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward or backward as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels e When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion This may cause damage to the lock mechanism if so equipped If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission WCE0161 Four wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that towing
24. Lift up on the latch located on the upper corner of the seatback to release the back of the seat This will enable you to fold the front passenger seatback flat over the seat cush ion To return the front passenger s seat to a seating position lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position Then pull up on the recline lever and lean the seatback to a proper seating position Release the lever to lock the seatback in position 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING If you fold the front passenger s seat back flat forward to carry longer ob jects be sure this cargo is properly se cured and not near an air bag In a crash an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person This could cause severe injury or even death Se cure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate See Precautions on supplemental restraint system later in this section When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop t LRS0398 LRS0399 LRS0400 Folding the rear bench seat To fold the rear bench seat up for storage capac ity behind the front seats or to remove the jacking tools from the storage area D Lift up on the lever located on the side
25. NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the Navigation System Places Street Address Address Book Home Previous Destination For more information about these commands see the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the audio system voice commands T 2 3 Press the button Say Audio Speak a command from the following avail able commands FM Switches the audio system to the FM mode AM Switches the audio system to the AM mode XM satellite radio if so equipped Switches the audio system to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio mode CD Switches the audio system to the CD mode A CD must be inserted for this command to be functional iPod Switches the audio system to the iPod mode An iPod must be connected for this command to be available and functional The following sub commands are available for iPod Now Playing Menu Playlists Artists Albums Genres Songs Shuffle Songs Composers Audiobooks Podcasts Say Next Page to access these com mands Say Previous Page to return to the first page of commands USB Switches the audio system to the USB mode A USB device must be inserted for this command to be available and functional Pandora Switches the audio system to the Pandora audio mode A compatible Bluetooth audi
26. appears in the vehicle information display If you select the tire pressure information in the display if so equipped the LOW PRESSURE warning message will be dis played The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated For additional information see Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The light will remain on after the 1 mi
27. 0 8 20 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL without Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV option Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 A CAUTION e Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst e Do not use E 15 or E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 15 or E 85 fuel Using E 15 or E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 15 or E 85 fuel can ad versely affect the emission control de vices and systems of the vehicle Dam age caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE FFV FUEL RECOMMENDATION if so equipped If your
28. 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue king pin load To determine the available towing capacity use the following procedure 1 Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this section 2 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum towing capacity To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed ona scale including passengers cargo and hitch 6 200 Ib 2 812 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 7 100 Ib 3 220 kg Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR from Towing Load Specification chart 15 100 Ib 6 848 kg Maximum Trailer
29. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them In addition to factory installed options your ve hicle may also be equipped with additional ac cessories installed by NISSAN or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures warnings cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and or accessory See a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular ac cessories with whic
30. Phonebook phones without automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phonebook Transfer Entry Delete Entry List Names C For phones that do not support automatic down load of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth pro file the Phonebook command is used to manu ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each phone connected to the system NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B Transfer Entry A Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to ini
31. READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condition Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing 9 42 Technical and consumer information EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data relate
32. System OFF button Rear window defroster button Air recirculation button Passenger temperature control dial DUAL button Air flow control buttons AUTO button A SOONG ARON gt 70 A WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals 4 32 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling or heating auto This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a con stant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Press the AUTO button on 2 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Driver and passenger temperatures can be set inde pendently Press DUAL to activate dual cli mate control functions Turn the passenger s side tempera
33. Text messaging in this section Select Phone Speak this command to select a phone to use from a list of those phones connected to the vehicle MAKING A CALL To make a call from a phone connected to the vehicle s Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Press the C4 button The system will prompt you for a command Select one of the available voice commands to continue a name Speak the name of a phone book entry to place a call to that entry The system will respond with the name it inter preted from your command and will prompt you to confirm that the name is correct Say Yes to initiate the call or No to hear an other name from the phonebook Number Speak this command to place a call by inputting numbers For 7 and 10 digit phone numbers speak the numbers When finished say Dial to initiate the call Say Correction at any time in the process to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted number For phone numbers with more digits or spe cial characters say Special Number then speak the digits Up to 24 digits can be entered Available special characters are star pound plus and pause When finished say Dial to initiate the call Say Correction at any time in the process to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted num ber or character Redial Speak this command to dial the number of the last outgoing call The system will displa
34. facing down Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows Hold the battery by the edges Holding the Open the lid using a coin battery across the contact points will seri 2 Remove the battery B ously deplete the storage capacity Do nottouch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction When changing the battery do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat tery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type Recommended battery CR2025 or equivalent 4 Close the lid securely 5 Press the button then the a button two or three times to check the key fob operation If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement perform step 5 An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal The keyfob is water resistant how ever if it does get wet immediately wipe completely dry The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft 10 m from the vehicle This range may vary with conditions FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired opera
35. i agit vente tan wearin RH SA eee 7 3 Tire dr ssirigs ossi desea ge hy gna ee ees 7 3 Cleaning interior 0 0 0 cece eee eee 7 4 Air 1eSh6ners eccccnnrcavetens eae PER br eod 7 4 Floor mts 5 oec ceret stiles Ae EEE REENER debs 7 4 Seat belts n222kceache sede RE SUMA MN Mg 7 5 Corrosion protection a e eee eee eee 7 5 Most common factors contributing to vehicle GOMOSION Pet E 7 5 Environmental factors influence the rate of GORFOSIOR v or obo doe sa a tacks Gamer Dos NAH dd 7 5 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild Soap a special vehicle so
36. tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt System for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery for seviceable batteries Check th e fluid level in each cell It sh
37. 1 and tilt the seatback The child restraint anchor points 2 can be accessed behind the rear bench seatback 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci dent or sudden stop SEAT BELTS AF qu Sit upright and well back d N sss0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces orterritories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 Sit upright and weil back 27 4 1277 EN ps TAN 7 Ju SSS0016 AA WARNING Every person who drives or rid
38. 1 Track Repeat All Repeat Repeat Off 1 Track Repeat the current track will be re peated All Repeat all songs in the current list are re peated Repeat Off no repeat play pattern is applied RANDOM RDM When the RDM button is pressed while a track is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Shuffle Off Track Shuffle Album Shuffle Shuffle Off Track Shuffle the tracks in the current list will be played randomly Album Shuffle the albums in the current list will be played randomly Shuffle Off no random play pattern is applied BACK button When the BACK button is pressed it returns to the previous menu Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 LHA2455 iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle remov
39. 14kg 70 kg 227 kg LTIO152 Example Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 Ibs 1 400 750 5 X 150 650 lbs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Inform
40. 2 38 Pedal posi tion adjustment switch if so equipped P 3 14 Rear power window switch if so equipped P 2 54 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Instruments and controls 2 3 METERS AND GAUGES CARE S A SET WIC1243 D ogsRom 4 Warning indicator lights Tachometer Engine coolant temperature gauge Voltmeter if so equipped Fuel gauge Speedometer Instruments and controls Automatic transmission fluid tempera ture gauge if so equipped Odometer Twin trip odometer Vehicle Information Display Engine oil pressure gauge if so equipped WIC1244 ca co gt 5 A z Og is 5 D z Og co ca y A zZ U WIC1245 1 Speedometer The twin trip odometer records the distance of 2 Odometer twin trip display individual trips 3 Change button SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed Odometer Twin trip odometer The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The odometer records the total distance the ve hicle has been driven Changing the display Pushing the change button changes the display as follows Tip A Trip B Odometer only Elapsed time driving distance and average speed information is also availabl
41. 5 806 kg 5 897 kg 5 897 kg 5 897 kg 5 897 kg 5 897 kg Towing load specification chart without tow package long wheel base Maximum Towing 7 100 Ib 220 kg 7 000 Ib ERE 75 kg capacity 1 2 3 Maximum Tongue load 2 3 710 Ib 322 kg 700 Ib 318 kg Maximum King pin load 1 065 Ib 483 kg 1 050 Ib 476 kg Maximum Gross Combined 12 800 Ib 5 806 kg 13 000 Ib 5 897 kg Weight Rating 1 The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity 2 Use of a weight distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 8 The maximum towing capacity when using the genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg and 500 Ib 227 kg tongue load Technical and consumer information 9 29 TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package The trailer tow package in cludes a receiver type frame mounted hitch This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your NISSAN dealer If yo
42. 7 position This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The amp 2 mode automati cally turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield This improves heater operation AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push inthe A C button to activate the air conditioner When the air condi tioner is on cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation 4 20 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air 1 Press the CS button to the OFF position 2 Press the 79 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Press the U button The indicator light onthe C button will come on air flow control button 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position For quick cooling when the outside tem perature is high push the S amp P button to the ON position The indicator light on the gt button will come on Be sure to return the gt to the OFF position for nor mal cooling The indicator light on the Ve button will go off You may also select MAX A C for quick cooling D
43. 75 1 1 908 4x4 S SV in mm 76 3 1 939 4x4 Pro AX in mm 76 9 1 954 4x4 SL in mm 76 7 1 949 Crew Cab LWB 4x2 S SV in mm 74 7 1 898 4x2 SL in mm 74 9 1 903 4x4 S SV in mm 76 3 1 939 4x4 Pro AX in mm 76 6 1 946 4x4 SL in mm 76 4 1 941 Front Track 18 inch tire in mm 67 9 1 725 20 inch tire in mm 68 1 1 729 Rear Track 18 inch tire in mm 67 9 1 725 20 inch tire in mm 68 1 1 729 Wheelbase Short wheel base in mm 139 8 3 550 Long wheel base in mm 159 5 4 050 Gross vehicle weight rating lb kg See the F M V S S C M V Gross axle weight rating S S certification label on Front Ib kg the center pillar between Rear Ib kg the driver s side front and rear doors Technical and consumer information 9 9 WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
44. Bluetooth streaming audio with Navigation System in this section For more information about the Pandora audio feature available with this system see Pandora audio in this section LHA2455 USB INTERFACE models without Navigation System if so equipped Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located inside the center console Insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio files on the stor age device can be played through the vehicle s audio system Audio file operation CD AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the CD AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If a CD is playing or another audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio the CD AUX button toggles between the three sources Play information Information about the audio files being played can be displayed on the display screen of the vehicle s audio system Depending on how the audio files are encoded information such as Folder Song and Artist will be displayed The track number and number of total tracks in the folder are displayed on the screen as well 144 pp SEEK CAT Reverse or Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT buttons M or FP for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played T
45. Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Visteon and Bosch OBluetooth SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires sub scription sold sepa rately Not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit WWW siriusxm com 2012 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Curr
46. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary Never use blocks on or under the jack In case of emergency 6 5 Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground 6 6 In case of emergency WCE0152 2 Place the jack directly under the jack up The jack should be used on firm and point as illustrated so the top of the jack level ground contacts the vehicle at the jack up point The jack up points are indicated by stamped ar rows on the side of the frame LCE0087 3 Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown 4 To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground 5 Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire WCE0063 I
47. RIGHT RIGHT OFF WHA1080 HEATING heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button Air A C Airflow Temp i i EAESEJEST X H HOT HI LAS o Air passed through WHA1081 4 30 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Air passed through HEATING amp heater core DEFROSTING DEFOGGING Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button P Air A C Airflow Tem Fan A Button control control control recirculation Ps HOT HI OFF pf RIGHT RIGHT OFF WHA1082 COOLING Air not passed through heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button Air recirculation button A C Button Fan control Air flow Temp control control Auto turns MAX COOL ON Auto turns A C LEFT ON HI RIGHT WHA1471 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 31 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic if so equipped 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LHA2468 Driver temperature control dial A C ON OFF button Front window defroster button Fan speed control dial
48. Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 35 COMPACT LHAO0099 AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Compact disc CD player A CAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD player e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD player e Only one CD can
49. The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system Recent Calls Main Menu Recent Calls Outgoing Incoming Missed Use the Recent Calls command to access out going incoming or missed calls Outgoing A Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle Incoming Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle Missed Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle that were not answered Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 93 Connect Phone NOTE The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Connect Phone Add Phone A Select Phone Delete Phone C Turn Bluetooth OFF D Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth function on the vehicle Add Phone Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle See Connecting procedure in this section for more information Select Phone Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the nam
50. WHA0918 HEATING amp DEFROSTING DEFOGGING Fan control dial 4 Air passed through heater core button w is5wl 5e e 2l97 9 Ce w Eu Air conditioner button Air flow controls 2 Air A C Air flow Tem Fan A Button control control control recirculation Pe HOT HI OFF 44 RIGHT RIGHT OFF Air recirculation Temperature control dial WHA0919 Type A Type A Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 23 COOLING Air not passed through l heater core Fan control dial Air recirculation Temperature button control dial Air conditioner button Air flow controls A C Airflow Temp Fan reci IL tion Button control control control button Auto MAX COOL HI Auto turns turns A C LEFT RIGHD ON WHA1362 Type A 4 24 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER manual Type B if so equipped A WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on
51. Warning 4WD warning light 2 16 Air bag warning light 1 62 2 18 Anti lock brake warning light 2 13 2 14 Battery charge warning light 2 15 Brake warning light 2 14 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Low fuel warning light 2 16 2 18 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low windshield washer fluid warning MEE rem ster Bae ns 2 24 Passenger air bag and status light 1 56 Seat belt warning light 2 18 Vehicle security system 2 25 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders x suma xx x EE ed 2 18 Warning labels for SRS 1 61 Warning lights 00 2 13 Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 9 Wheels andtires 20005 8 33 Wheel tiresize a 9 9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another Country s dae eee awe ee eS 9 10 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 52 Manual windows 00 2 53 Power rear windows 2 52 Power windows sss 2 51 Rear power windows 2 52 Rear sliding window 2 53 Windshield washer fluid 8 13 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Wiper blades
52. XM settings To view the XM settings 1 Press the MENU button 2 Select the Settings key 3 Select the XM key The signal strength activation status and other information are displayed on the screen 4 54 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM button Press the FM AM button to change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM If another audio source is playing when the FM AM button is pressed the audio source play ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing The FM stereo indicator ST is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio auto matically changes from stereo to monaural re ception XM band select Pressing the XM button will change the band as follows XM1 5 XM2 XM3 XM1 satellite if so equipped When the XM button is pressed while the ignition Switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the last station played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed to turn the radio on When the XM button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is
53. behind the rear bench seat REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH System 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0801 Rear facing web mounted step 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors WRS0802 Rear facing rigid mounted step 2 LRS0673 Rear facing step 3 3 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments LRS0674 Rear facing step 4 4 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try
54. children could become involved in seri e Safe parking procedures require that Bus accidents both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Fail 1 Firmly apply the parking brake ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi sult in an accident Make sure the shift tion selector has been pushed as far forward 3 To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal traffic when parked on an incline it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated Starting and driving 5 31 POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the engine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds A WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate 5 32 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at 2 wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depr
55. immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the ON OFF button Turn the VOL volume control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen sitive Volume When this feature is active the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes KS AUDIO SETUP Bass Treble Balance Fade Speed Sensitive Vol LHA2261 Audio settings 1 Press the MENU button 2 Select the Settings key 3 Select the Audio key Use the touchscreen to adjust the following items to the desired setting Bass Treble Balance and Fade Controls the sound of the audio system Balance adjusts the sound between the left and right speakers Fade adjusts the sound between the front and rear speakers Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 53 KS AUDIO SETUP Treble Balance Fade Speed Sensitive Vol AUX Volume Level LHA2262 Signal Strength XM Audio XM NavTraffic Marginal Signal Activated Authorized 00 00 AM XXXXXXXX Last Mes Receiv XM RADIO ID LHA2303 Speed Sensitive Vol Controls the level to which the volume is adjusted asthe vehicle s driving speed changes Choose a setting or choose 0 to disable the feature en tirely AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system Available options are Low Medium and High
56. in this section 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phonebook in this section 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 97 BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM Type B if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine ES Bluetooth C LHA2453 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can 4 98 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone con necti
57. indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Instruments and controls 2 17 Master warning light if so equipped This light comes on when various vehicle infor mation display warnings appear No key warning Low fuel warning Low windshield washer fluid warning Parking brake release warning Door open warning Loose fuel cap warning Check tire pressure warning M Seat belt warning light and or chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front pass
58. injury in an accident LRS0642 TWO POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITHOUT RETRACTOR center of the front bench seat if so equipped Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 21 LRS0643 LRS0644 LRS0645 Fastening the seat belts 2 Tighten the belt by pulling the free end of the 3 Position the lap belt low and snug on the belt away from the tongue hips as illustrated Insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0646 LRS0647 4 Loosen the belt by holding the tongue at a right angle to the belt then pull on the belt Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased The extender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur chasing an extender if an extender is required A WARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts Adults a
59. ol Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove 6 Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield A CAUTION After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure aS ce AD WDI0629 If you wax the surface of the hood be careful not to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle This may cause clogging or improper wind shield washer operation If wax gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin B BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer Self adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied A WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator soun
60. opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is dangerous It can cause unconsciousness or death PROGRAMMING HOMELINK9 If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 NOTE It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency 1 Position the end of your hand held transmit ter 1 3 inches 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink surface keeping the HomeLink indicator light 1 in view LIC2365 LIC2366 2 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and handheld transmitter button DO NOT re lease until the HomeLink indicator light 1 flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing
61. pants or damage the vehicle A CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating sur face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be con nected to these anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes When se lecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Checkthe child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories
62. position The puddle lights if so equipped and cargo light come on when any front or rear pas senger door is opened The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the bat tery from becoming discharged NOTE The door step lights if so equipped illumi nate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery PERSONAL LIGHTS if so equipped LIC0587 v v LIC0623 CONSOLE LIGHT if so equipped The console light 1 will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control The personal lights on the overhead console can be swiveled 360 degrees To turn on the light press the button Press the button again to turn off the light Instruments and controls 2 57 MAP LIGHTS if so equipped Ke y ENR LICO586 To turn the map lights on press the switches To turn them off press the switches again A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery
63. service for synthetic oil 2 Technical and consumer information FUEL RECOMMENDATION without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 A CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 15 or E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 15 or E 85 fuel Using E 15 or E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 15 or E 85 fuel can ad versely affect the emission control de vices and systems of the vehicle Dam age caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty e U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers develop
64. this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF In addition if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode child restraint mode this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passen ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the right front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the
65. which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Waituntil the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the amp button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command 4 100 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted f you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them f a command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice f you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press and hold the f button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session Whenever the VR ses sion is cancelled a dou
66. 1 25 Injured Person s uu rte 1 18 Larger children sss 1 25 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 15 Pregnant women sess 1 18 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 60 Seat belt extenders 1 23 Seat belt maintenance 1 23 Seat belts 4i 22s aay ag hake RE 1 15 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 21 Three point type with retractor 1 18 Two point type without retractor rear center lap belt ss 1 21 Seat belt warning light aaa 2 18 Seats Adjustments ex oa oy 1 2 Automatic drive positioner 3 25 Erontseats cuo oz Rs os Rn 1 2 Heated seats 2 0 llle 2 34 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 1 3 Security indicator light 2 20 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 26 3 2 5 11 Self adjusting brakes ls 8 21 Service manual order form 9 43 Servicing air conditioner 4 34 Setting button s 2 rrr n 4 7 Shifting Automatic transmission 5 15 5 16 Shiftlockrelease sese 5 19 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 21 Side air bag system See supplemental side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems 1 59 Sonar Rear system 2 i6Bbeiese bad 5 36 Spark plug replacement 8 17 Speedometer lesen 2 5 SRS warning label Ls 1 61 Starting Before starting the engi
67. 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments A CAUTION Do not adjust the pedal position with your foot on the pedal SUN VISORS To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor 2 To block glare from the side remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side 3 To extend the sun visor slide in or out as needed A CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before return ing the extension to its original position Do not pull the extension sun visor WPD0168 forcedly downward Type A VANITY MIRRORS if so equipped To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover if so equipped Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open WPD0344 Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 MIRRORS WPD0307 Type B 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0126 REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The night position 1 reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night Use the day position 2 when driving in daylight hours A WARNING Use the night position only when neces sary because it reduces rear view clarity AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims during night time conditions and ac cording to the intensity of the headlights of the
68. 23 Child Safety acu sai ee tto rhe ne ehm 1 24 loEu e ET 1 25 Small childrem oponen er PUR hU Larger children nime txt Child restraints 4 eter rue dar hr nenia Precautions on child restraints issue LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System sessiles Rear facing child restraint installation using Be TTE Rear facing child restraint installation using the seat belts 5 elec bein ethos Forward facing child restraint installation using LATCH su wesee rae has nm m ERES Fn Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat belts front passenger and rear bench seat ocean cce me mr ner es Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat belts front bench center POSITION EM Installing top tether strap Rear bench seat Booster Seals oisipe ko stie PR GR NR Supplemental restraint system 05 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSIEM 2220 soris pube xa me pias Ne urs EENS Supplemental air bag warning labels Supplemental air bag warning light SEATS The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased A CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contac
69. 3 Tailgate Truckbox P 3 21 4 Trailer hitch Towing if so equipped P 9 24 5 Replacing bulbs P 8 30 6 Bedside storage compartment if so equipped P 2 50 7 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 12 P 9 3 9 5 8 Fuel filler door P 3 12 9 Child safety rear door lock Crew Cab models only P 3 7 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details PASSENGER COMPARTMENT N a LII0029 DNOARWN 9 DVD entertainment system if so equipped P 4 73 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 54 Map lights if so equipped P 2 58 Sun visors P 3 15 HomeLink if so equipped P 2 58 Glove box P 2 45 Cup holders P 2 47 Front seats P 1 2 Folding rear bench seat P 1 13 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL j 234 5 8 T 8 5 1 10 11 1 26 24 27 25 23 22 20 18 21 19 17 15 14 LIC2437 0 6 Illustrated table of contents 10 11 12 13 14 Vents P 4 17 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn signal switch P 2 30 Steering wheel switch for audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System if so equipped P 4 71 P 4 83 P 4 98 P 4 109 Instrument brightness control P 2 33 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 47 P 2 34 Meters gauge
70. 5 36 Cold weather driving eee eee eee eee 5 37 Freeing a frozen door lock 0 e cess 5 37 Anti Ireeze sisse mda mer Gee teh n hes 5 37 Battery cases dee ARRA Rp IA i iee ki atea 5 87 Draining of coolant water 0 cee eee 5 38 Tire equipment 2 2 sites ken cept area mmn 5 38 Special winter equipment 000 5 38 Driving on snow OF ice 6 eee ee 5 38 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 39 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AA WARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide A WARNING Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fu
71. A WO N Start the vehicle Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks 6 Apply and hold the brake pedal Have someone retrieve and store the blocks While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de crease overall stability Therefore to main tain adequate control reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descend ing a hill as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine brak ing and reduces the need to brake as fre quently If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius d
72. BELTS FRONT BENCH CENTER POSITION A WARNING Never install a rear facing child re straint in the front passenger seat Front air bags inflate with great force A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child NISSAN recommends that child re straints be installed in the rear seat However if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front center bench seat follow these instructions carefully e A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen ger seat 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0914 Foward Facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a child restraint in the front center bench seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to o
73. Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section in this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of approximately 33 ft 10 m from the vehicle The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs contact a NISSAN dealer The keyfob will not function when the battery is discharged the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft 10 m The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the keyfob Do not allow the keyfob which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function Do not drop the keyfob 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object Do not change or modify the keyfob e Wetting may damage the keyfob If the keyfob gets wet immediately wipe until it is completely dry e Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the keyfob with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the keyfob ne
74. Door locke 2 i sonos ik Rx E nS 3 3 Glove boxllock i srs 2 Rem 2 45 Power door locks sss 3 4 Loose fuel cap warning 2 24 3 12 Low fuel warning light 2 16 2 18 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low windshield washer fluid warning light 2 24 Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 13 M Maintenance General maintenance 8 2 Inside the vehicle 8 3 10 4 Maintenance precautions 8 5 Outside the vehicle len 8 2 Seat belt maintenance 1 238 Under the hood and vehicle 8 4 Malfunction indicator light 2 19 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 1 3 Manual windows 004 2 53 Map lights sa e dos ren aad ms 2 58 Map pocket ades mane aodio Rm 2 46 Meters and gauges sees 2 4 Instrument brightness control 2 33 Mirror Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 16 Insidemiror less 3 16 Outside mirrors 2 3 Luces kms 3 18 Vanity MINOR 4 esu x dox ots oh e 3 15 Mooriroof Le c bm nk yog os 2 54 N NISSAN mobile entertainment system MES es ee waitin dw aa we aE ES S 4 73 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer SYSTEM s kd kee te OR eA LE 2 26 3 2 5 11 NISSAN voice recognition system 4 119 o Octane rating See fuel octane rating 9 4 Odometer ee Rm m 2 5 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel Iubricants see m aa ons 9 2 Changin
75. ER RR 1 47 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 60 Programmablefeatures ls s 4 7 Pushstarting llle 6 10 R Radio Car phone or CBradio 4 83 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player esa mex ns 4 43 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player 4 48 4 53 Readiness for inspection maintenance WM tests 2o 3x 9 42 Rear power windows sss 2 52 Rear sliding window sls 2 53 Rear sonar system 0004 5 36 Rear sonar system off switch 2 38 RearView Monitor 004 4 11 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIC PPP 2 28 Recorders Event data so ci oea eee G roe 9 42 Refrigerant recommendation 9 7 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 10 Remote controller See NISSAN mobile entertainment system sss 4 75 Remote keyless entry system 3 7 Reporting safety defects US only 9 41 S Safety Child safety reardoorlock 3 7 Child seat belts 1 26 1 32 1 36 1 43 Reporting safety defects US only 9 41 Screen See NISSAN mobile entertainment system ass haai Pur eo HEC ds 4 75 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment 1 2 1 3 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Seatback pockets sss 2 46 Seat belt Child safety lesen 1 24 Infants and small children
76. For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE A WARNING Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control if so equipped on slippery roads Sn
77. Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire A CAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants e Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst Do notrace the engine while warming it up e Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles They have higher ground clearance than passen ger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on pavement and off road applications This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate prob
78. P while a CD or MP3 WMA CD is playing to advance one track Press the seek button P several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track on a CD is skipped the first track on the disc is played If the last track in a folder of an MP3 WMA CD is skipped the first track of the next folder is played LHA2460 LHA1493 AUX button The AUX IN audio input jack is located in the center console and accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player or a laptop com puter 4 58 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack 4A EJECT button When the button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played When the button is pressed twice with a compact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds the disc will reload Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system see iPod player op eration with Navigation System in this section For more information about the USB interface available with this system see USB interface models with Navigation System in this section For more information about the Bluetooth audio interface available with this system see
79. REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini mum maintenance requirements with long ser vice intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular mainte nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emis sions and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintena
80. SETTINGS Sort Phonebook By Use Phonebook from Download Phonebook Now Phone Notifications for Record Name for Phonebook Entry LHA2302 PHONE SETTINGS To access the phone settings A O ND Press the MENU button Select the Settings key Select the Phone amp Bluetooth key Select the Phone Settings key and adjust the following settings as desired Sort Phonebook By Select First Name or Last Name to choose how phonebook entries are alpha betically displayed on the screen Use Phonebook From Select Handset to use the phone s phone book Select SIM to use the phonebook on the SIM card Select Both to use both sources Download Phonebook Now Select to download the phonebook to the vehicle from the chosen source Phone Notifications for Select Driver to have phone notifications shown in the vehicle information display Se lect Both to have phone notifications shownin both the vehicle information display and the center display screen Record Name for Phonebook Entry Select to record a name for a phonebook entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recog nition System Text Message Service Select to toggle the text message function ality on or off Show Incoming Text for Select Driver to have text message notifi cations shown in the vehicle information dis play Select Both to have text message notifications shown in both the vehicle infor mation disp
81. TUNE 44 or PP button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the compact disc plays at an increased speed while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc returns to normal play speed ra ci SEEK buttons When P is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning Press Pl several times to skip several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD ad vances 1 additional track The track number ap pears in the display window When the last track on the compact disc is skipped the first track is played When M is pressed the track being played returns to the beginning Press 4 several times to skip back several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back one track Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 SEEK Scan CDs button Press and hold the SEEK P button for more than 1 5 seconds to scan through the first 10 seconds of a track on the compact disc The SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode The scan mode is canceled once it scans through all the tracks on the disc or if the SEEK M or Pl button is pressed during the scan mode RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while the com pact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows 1 Normal 1 The track that is currently playing will be re peated RDM button When the RD
82. To view the compatible device connected to the AUX jacks press the MODE button For more information see Mode select button earlier in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 79 CARE AND MAINTENANCE Use a lightly dampened lint free cloth to clean the surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System DVD player face screen remote control etc Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme humidity conditions less than 1096 or more than 75 A CAUTION e Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions when cleaning the video system Do not use excessive force on the moni tor screen Avoid touching or scratching the moni tor screen as it may become dirty or damaged LHA0049 HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD ACAUTION e Handle a DVD by its edges Never touch the surface of the disc To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion e Do not use a conventional record cleaner benzine thinner or alcohol in tended for industrial use 4 80 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated e Never at
83. Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks B This is the normal oper ating oil level range If the oil level is below the L Low mark amp remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions A CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 WDIO0504 CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Place a large drain pan under the drain plug 8 Remove the drain plug B with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter in this sect
84. W Shift while depressing the brake pedal C gt Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting column After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector out of the P Park position A WARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N Neutral or any D Drive position the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch Move the shift selector to the P Park position then the key can be turned to LOCK P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position R Reverse A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stoppe
85. WARNING The ABLS system helps provide in creased traction but will not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering opera tion or by careless driving or dangerous driving practices Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces Al ways drive carefully Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab Sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN ap proved for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the ABLS system may not operate properly This could adversely af fect vehicle handling performance and the slip indicator light may illuminate If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain driving conditions the VDC System helps to perform the following functions Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle Controls brake pressure and
86. When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position it may be impos sible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone owner s manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplie
87. a Name List Names A Record Name For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth profile the Phonebook command is used to manage entries in the vehicle phonebook You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for each phone connected to the system When a phone is connected to the system the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call contacts by name You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing For more information see Record name in this section NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B List Names Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session See the Record name command in this section for infor mation about recording custom voice tags for list entries that the system has difficulty pronounc ing Record Name
88. accept any interference including interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 99 IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTHS is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Vis teon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System ObBluetooth If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds If the f button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will announce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc
89. air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 60 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seat belts with pretensioners Front seats A WARNING The pretensioners cannot be reused af ter activation They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but a pretensioner is not acti vated be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and if necessary re placed by your NISSAN dealer No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions Working with the seat belt retractor the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions
90. and do it yourself NOTE After installing a new air cleaner make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips A WARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER if so equipped The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals To replace the filter perform the following proce dure 1 n p lr TC 1 WDI0619 PATIN i cli LDI0387 LDI0404 1 Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins Remove the glove box from the opening and let it hang by the cord 2 Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the filter cover 3 Remove the old in cabin microfilters NOTE The filters are marked with air flow arrows The end of the filter with the arro
91. and reduces the chance of ve hicle damage or loss of control Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion will not up shift to a higher gear than is manually selected When the vehicle speed decreases the transmis sion automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop 89080 8 t LSD0090 Console shift Shift lock release If the battery is discharged the shift selector may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed To move the shift selector release the shift lock The shift selector can be moved to N Neutral However for models without the NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged a LSD0101 Column shift To push the shift lock release complete the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Apply the parking brake 3 On vehicles equipped with a column shifter tilt the steering wheel down to the lowest position 4 Remove the shift lock release cover as shown 5 Use a protective cloth on the end of a small screwdriver before inserting it in the shift lock release slot and pushing down 6 Move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release 7 For mod
92. apply a repeat play pattern to the CD When the repeat mode is active the Q icon will be displayed to the left of the song title If an MP3 CD is playing touch ing Repeat alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder The Q icon is displayed to the left of the song title or folder name to denote which pattern is applied To cancel Repeat mode touch the Re peat key until no Q icon is displayed Browse Touch the Browse key to display the titles on the CD in list format Touch the title of a song in the list to begin playing that song If an MP3 CD is Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57 playing touching the Browse key will also list the folders on the disc Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touchscreen to choose a folder x SEEK Reverse or Fast Forward buttons l Press and hold the seek buttons M or PP for 1 5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the but ton is released the compact disc returns to nor mal play speed x Press the seek button 44 while a CD or MP3 WMA CD is playing to return to the begin ning of the current track Press the seek button M4 several times to skip backward sev eral tracks l SEEK buttons Press the seek button
93. as necessary or put the re straint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 1 42 6 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 5 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0392 Anchor point access INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP Rear bench seat To access the anchor points 2 behind the rear bench seat tilt the rear seatback forward by lifting up on the pull strap 1 behind the seat back WRS0423 Rear bench seat Before securing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors rear outboard seating po sitions only or the seat belt as applicable follow these steps 1 If necessary raise or remove the head re straint to position the top tether strap 1 over the top of the seatback If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information 2 Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint 3 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point 3 on the seat directly behind the child restraint 4 Return the seatback to the locked posit
94. be loaded into the CD player at a time Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely e The player may skip while driving on rough roads e The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment tempera ture is extremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use 4 36 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Do not expose the CD to direct sun light CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R e Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed CHECK DISC e Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc Confirm
95. blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits The road surface may be slippery Turn signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated 2 20 Instruments and controls Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on Vehicle Dynamic Control VDO off indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF the transfer case is in the 4LO position PYA model or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not functioning properly This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper ating Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDO system in the Starting and driving sec tion of this manual The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 sec onds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the indicator light while you are driving have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal The VDC system will
96. child restraints 1 26 1 32 1 36 1 43 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 30 Child safety rear door lock 3 7 Chimes audible reminders 2 20 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 Glocke i ti eee a Rer eHeiep o eed s 4 44 C M V S S certification label 9 11 Cold weather driving ss 5 37 Compact disc CD player Control panel buttons sss 4 4 Brightness contrast button 4 11 Enter Dutton su Sota ea ee eo d 4 4 Setting button sls 4 7 Controls Heater and air conditioner GOntrols 22x nnn oe 4 17 4 25 4 32 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants ee 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Corrosion protection sls 7 5 Cruise control issic oe ee ee ee ee 5 21 Cup holders 250 068 262084484800 2 47 Curtain side impact and rollover air bag 1 59 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 32 10 2 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIC es res tuve m edn a ea a 2 Digital video disc DVD 4 Dimensions and weights Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 Display controls see control panel buttons DoorlockS 5 02 9 9m Ene Drive belt zu goros nus hoe d Tonan 8 Drive positioner Automatico 3 Driving Cold
97. climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 119 jm A N Giving voice commands E LHA2522 1 Press the l button 2 The system announces Please say a com mand A list of available commands is spo ken by the system 3 After the tone sounds and the face icon on the display changes speak a command Available commands are discussed later in this section 4 Voice and display feedback are provided when the command is accepted If the command is not recognized the sys tem announces Command not recog nized Repeat the command in a clear voice If you want to cancel the command or go back to the previous menu of commands press the button The system will an nounce Voice recognition canceled or Go back depending on the current menu level Press the BACK button on the control panel to move back through the menus displayed on the screen If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback use the volume control switches on the steering wheel or the volume knob on the control panel 4 120 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information by Google Google e Weather la Sond To Car Voice LHA2253 The voice command screen can also be accessed using the control panel display 1 Press the MENU button 2 Select the Voice Commands key Operating tips To get the best performance out of NIS
98. closed when backing up e Do not put anything on the rearview camera The rearview camera is in stalled beside the license plate light When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal function fire or an electric shock Do not strike the camera It is a preci sion instrument Otherwise it may mal function or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock A CAUTION There is a plastic cover over the camera Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 11 LHA0437 REARVIEW CAMERA SETTINGS Show Guidelines LHA2278 HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line are displayed on the monitor Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body Red line approx 1 5 ft 0 5 m Yellow line approx 3 ft 1 m Green line 3 approx 7 ft 2 m Green line 4 approx 10 ft 3 m The on screen guidelines can be set to on or off With the shift selector in the Reverse R position Press the CAMERA button to toggle the feature on and off With the shift selector in any position other than the Reverse R position 1 Pres
99. eject the DVD by pushing the eject button If the disc cannot be ejected see your NISSAN dealer for further assistance Re program the radio presets Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 81 LHA0318 SAA0723 Remote control and headphones battery replacement Replace the battery as follows Open the lid 2 Replace batteries with new ones Size AA remote control Size AAA headphones Make sure that the 9 and 9 ends on the batteries match the markings inside the compartment 3 Close the lid securely If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement close the lid se curely lf you will not be using the remote control for long periods of time remove the batteries Replacement of the batteries is needed when the remote control only functions at extremely close distances to the DVD player or not at all Be careful not to touch the battery terminal An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment Always confirm local regu lations for battery disposal 4 82 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the remote control and head phones FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device compl
100. emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result 9 10 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION d LTIOO85 LTIOO86 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown WTIO095 2 p WTI0099 p SM zi t AE TOT ISHURd WTIO0189 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emiss
101. flat tire while driving For more details refer to Warning Indicator Lights and Audible Reminders in the Instruments and con trols section Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air condi tioner audio and phone systems section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving sec tion and Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long distance trips The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds Incorrect tire pressure including under in flation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling A WARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail sud denly and caus
102. go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN If Transport Canada receives complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may request that NISSAN con duct a recall campaign However Trans port Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or NISSAN You may contact Transport Canada s De fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1 800 333 0510 You may also report safety defects online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans port Canada s Road Safety Information Centre at 1 800 333 0371 or online at www tc gc ca roadsafety English speak ers or www tc gc ca securiteroutiere French speakers To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1 800 387 0122 Technical and consumer information 9 41
103. hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Fan speed control dial Air recirculation button Temperature control dial Air conditioner button Air flow control dial Rear window defroster switch if so equipped CONTROLS Fan control dial oog2omc Type B Air flow control dial WHA0535 The air flow control dial allows you to select the air flow outlets MAX Air flows from center and side A C vents with maximum cooling air conditioning p Air flows from center and side vents v Air flows from center and side The fan control dial turns the fan on and off and controls fan speed vents and the front and rear floor outlets Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 s Air flows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets 3 Air flows from defroster outlets and the front and rear floor outlets Air flows mainly from defroster outlets The air flow control dial also has intermediate positions which allow the air flow to be distrib uted between 2 of the icon positions on the air flow control dial Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air To lower the
104. if so equipped Front passenger air bag status light High beam indicator light Blue Malfunction indicator light MIL Security indicator light if so equipped Slip indicator light Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Con trol VDO off indica tor light Illustrated table of contents 0 9 MEMO 0 10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats ie errorae seb te E VE IX ee eR PX S RAO ERU 1 2 Front manual captain s chair seat adjustment if so equipped 2 eee eee eee eee eee eee 1 2 Front manual bench seat adjustment if so equipped sirr ss cece eee eee eee ee 1 3 Front power seat adjustment if so equipped os sises roscricrssicorsites eee ee 1 4 Armrests if so equipped 06 6 cee eee eee 1 6 Head restraints 1st row only 0 00e0ee eee 1 6 Head restraints 2nd row outboard positions only 2e medendi RE Rp eee 1 9 Flexible seatihg oorr eR erem 1 11 Seat belts 5p rero t oA e REATUS TER 1 15 Precautions on seat belt usage Lus 1 15 Pregnant women errien ese eee e nnne 1 18 Injured Persons 2 Reha 1 18 Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 18 Two point type seat belt without retractor center of the front bench seat if so equipped 6 cece eee eee eee 1 21 Seat belt extenders 0 e eee eae 1 23 Seat belt maintenance 000 1
105. in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However no
106. indi cates successful programming NOTE Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in the Programing HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers section 3 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e if the indicator light 1 is solid continuous programming is complete and your device should acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released Ifthe indicator light D blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a solid continuous light continue with Steps 4 6 for a rolling code device A second person may make the following steps easier Use a ladder or other device Instruments and controls 2 59 Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps 4 At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or smart button the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit If there is difficulty locating the button reference the garage door opener s manual 5 Press and release the learn or smart but ton 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink button for two seconds and release Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3 times to complete the training process HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device
107. information e eee eee 9 13 lemnS iizicseljestenuictteii e eit undx dedo 9 13 Vehicle load capacity leise 9 13 Securing the load exer s 9 15 Utili track channel system if so equipped 9 16 Loading tIpS ss verit Re ur sauia auinens 9 21 Truck camper loading information 9 22 Crew Gab Models viver te Re ER REA 9 22 King Cab models nete er erbe RRRR ERR 9 22 Special Body vehicles 2 0005 9 22 Location for center of gravity 0 008 9 22 Payload weight capacity lsesseessee 9 23 Measurement of weights 000s eee 9 23 Towing a trailer ome eem eed 9 24 Maximum load limits 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 9 24 Towing load specification 0 e eee 9 28 Towing safety ccecc deer eerte tenes 9 30 Flat towing i csszerRezerkeef bee ma der aes 9 39 SnoWw plOW pic ie ptr ren bae ahha rts 9 39 Uniform tire quality grading isses 9 39 Emission control system warranty sisse 9 40 Reporting safety defects cc eee eee eee 9 41 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 42 Event Data Recorders EDR ssssssssse 9 42 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 43 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be a little different When refilling follow the procedure des
108. ing on the front passenger seat occupied status The light operates as follows Unoccupied passenger s seat The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The right front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is oper ated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor pressure sensor It is in the bottom of the right front passenger seat cushion and is de signed to detect an occu
109. is active when the ignition switch is placed to the ON position and the shift selector is in R Reverse When sensors detect obstacles within 5 9 ft 1 8 m of the rear bumper a beeping tone is emitted 2 38 Instruments and controls The rear sonar system can be disabled by push ing the OFF switch When the system is disabled the indicator light on the switch will illuminate Push the switch again to enable the system The indicator light will go off The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned on See Rear sonar system in the Starting and driving section TOW MODE SWITCH TOW MODE LICO594 Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage How ever fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the tow mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position For additional information refer to Tow mode in the Technical and consumer information sec tion later in this manual POWER OUTLETS Front row
110. it will also show the current menu option To select the current menu option press the PHONE SEND button To go back to the previous menu press the PHONE END 4 m button If the current menu is the Main Menu pressing the PHONE END 4 x button will exit the Phone system To exit the manual control mode press and hold the PHONE END 4 button for 5 seconds 4 96 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved Symptom System fails to interpret the command correctly The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands in this section 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Voice Adaptation VA mode
111. less than 2 seconds the display menu will appear on the Screen The display menu will remain on the screen for 10 seconds if no subsequent control activations occur Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within the display menu and use ENTER to select the item Holding the DISPLAY control on the face plate for longer than approximately 2 sec onds while in the display menu will reset the display characteristics to their nominal val ues Faceplate feature only If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate is pressed for more than 2 seconds the media track time information will be displayed along the bottom of the display Pressing the DISPLAY control for more than 2 seconds will remove the media track time information from the display Faceplate feature only NAVIGATION KEYS If media is in PLAY mode activation of the NAVI GATION KEYS Up Down Left and Right will perform the following functions next chapter track previous chapter track fast re 4 78 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems verse and fast forward and the display will show Pl M 44 and P gt respec tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds Faceplate feature only If media is in PAUSE mode activation of the NAVIGATION KEYS Up Down and Right will perform the following functions next chapter track previous chapter track and slow forward and the display will show Pl M and a for
112. load of 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load Specification chart C allg o LTI0161 The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling braking and performance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The engine protection mode which helps reduce the chance of engine damage could activate and automati cally decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions A WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision
113. loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine A WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING e Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed e Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck A CAUTION When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used e Always attach safety chains before towing
114. meter M2 Second Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 M2 M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter 5 18 Starting and driving M1 First Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on the meter Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range This reduces fuel economy When shifting up Move the shift selector to the up side Shifts to higher range When shifting down Move the shift selector to the down side Shifts to lower range The transmission will automatically down shift the gears For example if you select the 3rd range the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession When canceling the manual shift mode Press the manual shift mode button to return the transmission to the normal driving mode e Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion may not shift to the selected gear immediately because of vehicle speed The transmission will up or down shift when vehicle speed matches the pro grammed transmission shift points This helps maintain driving perfor mance
115. movement of the ve hicle during engine braking accelerat ing or turning which may result in an accident and serious personal injury 5 30 Starting and driving A CAUTION After using the E Lock system turn the Switch OFF to prevent possible damage to driveline components from extended use Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 12 MPH 20 km h when the sys tem is engaged Doing so could damage drivetrain components Do not turn on the E lock system while the tires are spinning Doing so could damage drivetrain components PARKING PARKING ON HILLS e HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB A Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb e HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen WSD0050 ae ter of the road if it moves A WARNING e Never leave the engine running while 4 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi the vehicle is unattended tion Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire Do notleave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended
116. not use good contact is not made the plug may NER double adapters or more than one electrical ac overheat or the internal temperature cessory fuse may open A CAUTION e When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water or any other Operation of the 120 volt system with liquid to contact the outlet the ignition in the ON position and the engine not running idle will drain the battery charge This could lead to a dead battery or no start condition CERE The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Use power outlets with the engine run Sidet LICOS6S ning to avoid discharging the vehicle Iae sray battery INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE e Do not use double adaptors or more TRAYS than one electrical accessory ET Avoid using power outlets when the air A conditioner headlights or rear window Do not place sharp objects in the trays to defroster is on help prevent injury in an accident or sud den stop Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory The rubber mats can be removed for cleaning being used is turned OFF 2 42 Instruments and controls KL CER Center tray if so equipped LICO566 LIC1369 LIC1370 CONSOLE BOX if so equipped Console box storage trays Console box storage Pull up
117. of the seat while lifting the front of the seat cushion up 2 Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward the back of the vehicle until it locks in place 3 Repeat this process to raise and secure the seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle for maximum storage capacity To return the rear bench seat to a seating posi tion reverse the process Make sure to prop erly push the seat cushion down into place Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 A WARNING e When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Never ride in the rear seat unless the seat bottom cushions are in place and latched When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop WRS0920 Folding the rear bench seatback down The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward to access the child restraint anchor point locations To tilt the seatback forward pull the strap up
118. oil have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine 2 8 Instruments and controls LIC1136 WIC1247 VOLTMETER if so equipped AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When the ignition switch is placed in the ON TEMPERATURE GAUGE if so position the voltmeter indicates the battery volt equipped age When the engine is running it indicates the generator voltage While cranking the engine the volts drop below the normal range If the needle is not in the normal range 11 15 volts while the engine is running it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer This gauge indicates the temperature of the au tomatic transmission fluid The automatic trans mission fluid temperature is in the normal range 0 when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in For information about the automatic anti glare A CAUTION mE u dicates the heading direction of the vehicle feature refer to Automatic anti glare rearview e This gauge is not designed to indicate mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust low automatic transmission fluid level With the ignition switch in the ON position preSS ments section Use the dipstick to check the fluid level the or j bu
119. on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains cables should not be installed on P275 60R20 size tires Installation of the tire chains cables on P275 60R20 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should install P265 70R18 size tires on your vehicle Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself vehicle and are
120. on the display 2 Selectone ofthe following options to make a call Phonebook Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook Call Lists Select the name from the in coming outgoing or missed call history Redial Dial the last outgoing call from the vehicle e amp Input the phone number manually using a keypad displayed on the screen For information on how to use the touchscreen see How to use the touchscreen in this section 4 114 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Phone CI8Ya Incoming call pag LHA2298 RECEIVING A CALL When a call is placed to the connected phone the display will change to phone mode To accept the incoming call either e Press the amp button on the steering wheel or Touch the green phone icon on the screen To reject the incoming call either Press the 4 wheel or button on the steering Touch the red phone icon on the screen Phone CI8Ya Call Waiting P BHIHHHEHHHRE 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX Duration 0 01 25 LHA2299 DURING A CALL While a call is active the following options are available on the screen Handset Select this option to switch control of the phone call over to the handset Mute Mic Select this option to mute the microphone Select again to unmute the microphone Red phone icon Select to end th
121. or less and the E Lock system switch must be turned ON When the E Lock switch is turned ON the indi cator light will flash until the system engages However if all operation conditions listed above are not met or the system becomes disengaged the indicator light will continue to flash The Anti Lock Brake ABS system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON Also the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is disabled and the VDC light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON See Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system in the Starting and Driving section for further explanation and system limitations A WARNING e Never leave the E Lock system ON when driving on paved or hard surfaced roads Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury After us ing the E Lock system to free the ve hicle turn the system OFF e Use the E Lock system only when free ing a stuck vehicle Try the 4LO position before using the E Lock system Never use the E Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice sur face Using the E Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the ve hicle during engine braking accelerat ing or turning which may result in an accident and serious personal injury A CAUTION After using the E Lock system turn the Switch OFF to prevent possible d
122. or per sonal injury Starting and driving 5 23 A CAUTION TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING Do notdrive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO PROCEDURES position on dry hard surface roads Driv The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO 2WD 4H and 4LO so you can select the desired may cause unnecessary noise tire wear drive mode according to the driving conditions and increased fuel consumption 2WD or 4WD shift procedure If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads inthe 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N Neu tral position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift Switch to 2WD e If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible 5 24 Starting and driving Biber Driven 4WD shift Transfer 4LO position Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure qq 2 3 Move the 4WD switch R heel For driving on dry paved roads 2WD lt gt 4H MEN ear wheels Economy drive 4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position engaged IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT SE E LECT TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OPERATION For driving on enema snow PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT Neutral Neutral disengages the automatic trans 1 Stop the vehicle i missio
123. outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control dial Turn the fan speed control dial S8 left or right to manually control the fan speed or turn the system on or off Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the air recirculation button to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle Push the AUTO button to return to automatic mode The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF floor or floor defrost mode Air flow control Press the air flow control buttons to manually control air flow and select the air outlet e 7 Air flows from center and side vents 74 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets Air flows from defroster and foot outlets XU Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the OFF button OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 LIC0836 The sunload sensor 1 located on t
124. painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID MAX z MIN LDI0374 WDI0405 BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer RESERVOIR Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir periodi cally Add windshield washer fluid when the low windshield washer fluid warning light comes on if so equipped To fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield washer fluid into the reservoir opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent ACAUTION Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for windshield washer fluid This may result in damage to the paint Do not fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir
125. position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve hicle NOTE Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth devices If your phone does not connect automatically to the system consult the phone s Owner s Manual for details on device operation You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connect ing instructions You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place
126. quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi tion After turning the ignition key to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 55 9 PY OFF Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Status light The right front passenger air bag status light 7 is located under the climate controls After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or operates depend
127. reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section e The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts 1 48 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags as needed Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor pressure sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some con
128. required LIC1199 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition key is turned to OFF The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty The 4g indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle A CAUTION e If the vehicle runs out of fuel the C1 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips the C light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving trips have the ve hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Mal function Indicator Light MIL later in this section LIC1198 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE if so equipped The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys tem oil pressure while the engine is running The needle should be in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running Instruments and controls 2 7 A CAUTION This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section e If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine
129. s neiuer to hue rt e nn ea Ra rures 5 9 Automatic transmission eee 5 10 Ignition switch positions sssseeseeesee 5 11 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System if so equipped 6 eee eee eee eee 5 11 Before starting the engine cece eee 5 11 Starting the engine 0 e eee eee eee 5 12 Driving the vehicle lese 5 18 Engine protection mode lseeseeesee 5 18 Automatic transmission 0 00 0c eee eee 5 14 Parking brakes sicn csrnde ppp Fide etre cere gral 5 20 Cruise control if so equipped eee eee 5 21 Precautions on cruise control 0 005 5 21 Cruise control operations 05 5 21 Break iri schedule conr eter et 5 22 Increasing fuel economy esee 5 23 E3z 3 Using four wheel drive 4WD if so equipped 2 6 cece eect eens 5 23 Transfer case shifting procedures 5 24 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system if so equipped spes sssrei e rrsisecsieerisriis rinu 5 29 Parking parking on hills liiis 5 31 Power Steering ur cresteri e rev re dy dud ep uit 5 32 Brake System ccisska saos qe ep enr eed 5 32 Brake precautions eet nes eroe oet pedet 5 32 Anti lock Braking System ABS sss 5 33 Active brake limited slip ABLS system 5 34 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 5 35 Rear sonar system if so equipped sss
130. same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may dam age the transmission transfer case and differential gears If excessive tire wear is found it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size brand construction and tread pattern The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary Contact a NISSAN dealer Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressur
131. screen 10 TUNE SCROLL knob ENTER SETTING 5 M4 SEEK button button l 6 SCAN button 11 AUX IN jack Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 47 FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type A if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL volume knob ON OFF button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL volume knob ON OFF button while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL volume knob ON OFF button Turn the VOL volume knob ON OFF button to adjust the volume Bluetooth Bass Treble Balance Fade LHA2257 E Ca Gotti Speed Sens Vol AUX Vol Brightness Contrast Clock Adjust 7 C C07 36 LHA2258 SETTING button Press the SETTING button to show the Settings screen on the display Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER button to make a selection Bass Treble Balance and Fade Increase or decrease the level of bass treble balance or fade Balance controls the level of sound between the left and right speakers Fade controls the level of sound between the front and rear speakers 4 48 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Speed Sens Vol S
132. seat belts P 1 15 2 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag P 1 47 3 Front seat belts P 1 15 4 Front seat Active Head Restraints 5 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 47 6 Seats P 1 2 7 Occupant classification sensor pressure sensor P 1 56 8 Seat belt with pretensioner P 1 60 9 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag P 1 47 10 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children P 1 28 11 Top tether strap anchor point P 1 30 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details LII2021 O 2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT WII0116 14 Engine hood P 3 11 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 27 Windshield P 8 20 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 54 Power windows P 2 51 Door locks keyfob keys P 3 3 3 7 3 2 Mirrors P 3 16 Tire pressure P 9 12 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 40 Replacing bulbs P 8 30 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 30 Fog light switch if so equipped P 2 33 Tow hooks if so equipped P 6 13 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR A LII0027 0 4 Illustrated table of contents 1 Rear sliding window if so equipped P 2 53 2 Vehicle loading P 9 13
133. see Heater and air con ditioner in this section The air recirculation amp 2 button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 21 DEFROSTING DEFOGGING Air passed through heater core Fan control dial Air recirculation Temperature control dial button Air conditioner button Air flow controls A C Airflow Temp Fan OL Button control control control Tec ston HOT HI OFF Cu RIGHT RIGHT OFF WHA0916 BI LEVEL HEATING Q a Fan control dial Air passed through heater core Air conditioner button Air flow controls A C Airflow Temp Fan air i Button control control control e tan 5 HOT HI OFF A RiGhn iGHD OFF Air recirculation Temperature button control dial WHAO0917 Type A Type A 4 22 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Air passed through heater core HEATING Fan control dial Air recirculation Temperature button control dial om i ow ew oF G Seana Air conditioner button Air flow controls Air A C Air flow Temp Fan recirculation Button control control control utton HOT HI OFF 4 RIGHT RIGHT FF
134. sequence il lustrated B In case of emergency 6 9 A CAUTION Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground for example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 RPM and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started A CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again 7 After starting the engine carefully discon nect the negative cable and then the positive cable 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid 6 10 In case of emergency PUSH STARTING A WARNING Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged A CAUTION Automatic transmission models cannot be push started or tow started Attempt ing to do so may cause transmission damage IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS A WARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire
135. side air bags curtain and rollover supplemental air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supple mental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replace ment of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle A WARNING e Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Addition ally the activated pretensioners must also be replaced The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired The front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle e If you need to dispose of a supplemen tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Cor rect supplemental air bag and preten sioner system disposal procedures are set f
136. so equipped defroster SWOR ses Lese p Peur eR Dee bn eq 2 28 Headlight and turn signal switch 004 2 30 Headlight control switch 0 eee 2 30 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 32 Instrument brightness control 008 2 33 Turn signal switch iei ee rv cement 2 33 Fog light switch if so equipped 2 33 Plo soe eidt pom per ccpe bad bats Crean bisce bindet lu 2 34 Cargo lamp switch if so equipped sss 2 34 Heated seats if so equipped cece eee eee 2 34 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off switch 2 36 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system Switch if so equipped 6 c eee eect e eee 2 36 Power inverter switch if so equipped 2 37 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped 2 38 TOW mode sWitcl cesspit annie niue cadens etn 2 38 Power o tlets 53 eod bbe td oreet tege 2 39 129v Outlets 2c octo sb ER Epp a semi 2 39 120v outlet if so equipped ssssssse 2 40 jn cS PME 2 42 Instrument panel storage trays suus 2 42 Console box if so equipped sssuse 2 43 Center armrest storage if so equipped 2 44 Glove OKs iho essei tho aE 2 45 Sunglasses holder if so equipped 2 45 Map pockets 2s 2n Ret nep 2 46 Seatback pocket if so equipped 2 46 Overhead console if so equipped 2 46 Cup holders
137. temperature turn the dial to the left To increase the temperature turn the dial to the right Air recirculation button ON position Push the amp button to recirculate air inside the vehicle Push the amp gt button to the on position when driving on a dusty road to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas senger compartment formaximum cooling when using the air con ditioner The air recirculation mode is only functional when the air flow control mode is in the following positions H o H OFF position Push the gt button again to turn air recircula tion off Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the se lected outlet Use the off position for normal heater or air con ditioner operation Air conditioner button Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push the A C button to turn on the air conditioner A C will appear on the display when the air conditioner is operating To turn off the air conditioner pushthe A C button again The display will show A C OFF The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch For more information about the rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual
138. that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA if so equipped CD Compact disc with MP3 or WMA if so equipped Terms e MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Micro soft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encodin
139. the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the 1 Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to illuminate If the 7 light illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The 7 light should turn off after a few driving trips Ifthe L light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle in spected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section in this manual If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage For additional information see Fuel recommen dation without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option and Flexible fuel vehicle FFV fuel recommendation in the Technical and consumer information sec tion in this manual LPD0325 WARNING bg LOOSE FUEL RS CAP i MPH e SY e o LRS2005 To remove the fuel filler cap 1 Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise to remove 2 Loop the tether strap around the hook 1 while refueling To install the fuel filler cap 1 Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube 2 Turn the fuel filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard Loose Fuel Cap warning The LOOSE FUEL CAP warni
140. the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual Starting and driving 5 37 DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type Size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 5 38 Starting and driving 3 Tire chains may be used
141. the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information 1 2 CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions This device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the fol
142. the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM Type A if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 83 3 Bluetooth LHA2453 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone con necting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle 4 84 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
143. the name it interpreted based on the voice command provided If the name is incorrect say Correction to hear another name Once the correct phonebook entry is identi fied say Dial to dial the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number Say Record Name to record a name for the phonebook entry Say Delete Recording to delete a recorded name for the phonebook entry List Names Speak this command to have the system list the names in the phonebook one by one alphabetically Say Dial to dial the number of the current name or Send Text to send a text message to that number Say Next En try or Previous Entry to move through the list alphabetically Say Record Name to record a name for the current phonebook entry Say Delete Recording to delete a recorded name for the current phonebook entry Transfer Entry This command can be used to transfer mul tiple contacts at a time To enable manual contact transfer capability set Phonebook Download to Off in the Setting menu The ability to transfer contacts via the OPP Bluetooth profile depends on your mobile phone See your phone s Owner s Manual for details and instructions Delete Entry Speak this command to delete an entry in the phonebook Choose an entry to delete by speaking the desired name or say List Names Recent Calls The following commands are available under Recent Calls Incoming Calls Speak this command t
144. the screw counterclockwise to lower the pattern EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight assembly High 9005 HB3 Low 9006 HB4 Park Turn 3457K Sidemarker t 194 Side turn signal light if so equipped LED Front fog light if so equipped 880 Puddle light if so equipped 9 906LF Room map lights front Personal lights AL67 Vanity mirror light if so equipped Step light if so equipped A 194 High mounted stop light cargo lights 912LF Rear combination light Tail Stop 3157K Backup reversing 921LF Turn Tailgate light if so equipped License plate light See a NISSAN dealer for replacement Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 WDIO0409 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself T IN e Room map light if so equipped Personal lights if so equipped Step light if so equipped Puddle light Side turn signal light if so equipped High mount stoplight cargo lights License plate light Rear combination tailgate light if so equipped assembly Fog light if so equipped Headlight assembly WDIO0263 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens lamp and or cover t Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation LDI0389 3 0 aE Int
145. the settings of an item When there are more items than can be dis played on one screen touch the up arrow to scroll up the page or touch the down arrow 4 to scroll down the page 4 6 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a set number of conditions For example the Display Mode can be set to Automatic Day or Night To adjust this type of item touch the item 1 The item will cycle through the available settings and the red indicator lights to the left of the setting condition 2 will come on or turn off accordingly _ s olule I7 TY T9T3 T9 T9 A s o riseiu t UL EzIxEelvisIn IwI I e space Ja T LHA2247 Inputting characters Touch the letter key 1 There are some options available when inputting characters e 123 ABC Changes the available character set to num bers Space Inserts a space Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters e OK Completes the character input Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen use a dry soft cloth If additional cleaning is necessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never spray the screen with water or de tergent Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the Screen HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON Press the BACK button
146. the transmis sion and repair it if necessary 5 20 Starting and driving PARKING BRAKE A WARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident LSD0158 To engage Firmly depress the parking brake To release 1 Firmly apply the foot brake 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion 3 Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release 4 Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out CRUISE CONTROL if so equipped CANCEL V LSD2003 ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch CANCEL switch ON OFF switch TODE PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL f the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display then blinks to warn the driver see Vehicle infor mation display in the Instruments and con trols section e f the SET indicator light blinks push the cruise control ON OFF switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise
147. the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings Technical and consumer information 9 23 TOWING A TRAILER A WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents A CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Forthe first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing 9 24 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight e When towing a trailer
148. the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadver tently becoming unlatched Avoid abrupt starts accelera
149. theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your keys in the ignition and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security System 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Remove the from the ignition switch 3 Close all doors Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the key power door lock switch if the door is opened locked and then closed or with the keyfob Instruments and controls 2 25 Keyfob operation Push the button on the keyfob All doors lock The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked When the button is pushed with all doors locked the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked The horn may or may not beep Refer to Silencing the horn beep feature vehicles without navigation system in the Pre driving chec
150. tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Starting and driving 5 3 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 5 4 S
151. to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons Individual buttons cannot be cleared However individual buttons can be reprogrammed see Reprogramming a single HomeLink button in this section To clear all programming 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds 2 Release both buttons HomeLink is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming HomeLink Step 1 REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton DO NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming HomeLink Step 1 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been repro
152. to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually NISSAN recommends that the cruise con trol if so equipped not be used while tow ing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual Tow mode Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is turned OFF Tow mode includes the following features Grade logic Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grad
153. to remove any slack WRS0697 Forward facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 7 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 6 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS FRONT PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH SEAT A WARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section r WRS0699 Forw
154. top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor WRS0800 Forward facing rigid mounted step 2 3 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is re moved See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 LRS0671 Forward facing step 4 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments 5 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions
155. unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status For example if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 57 If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light Af located in the meter and gauges area on the driver s side of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AA WARNING Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate e Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself
156. until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See In stalling top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 37 LRS0667 Forward facing step 4 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRS0668 Forward facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0681 Forward facing step 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack
157. using the Pandora mu sic service Connecting a device for use with Pandora audio Devices capable of streaming Pandora audio can be connected to the vehicle s audio system via the USB input jack The USB input jack is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls Once connected the Pandora controls will be displayed on the control panel display screen Compatibility The following iPhone models are compatible with the system iPhone 3GS iPhone 4 iPhone 4S The latest Pandora application should be in stalled on the phone Album XXXXXXXX Song XXXXXXXX Artist XXXXXXXX Presets 3 57 GID a9 G4 ron LHA2283 Models without Navigation System Audio main operation Models without Navigation System To switch to the Pandora audio mode press the CD AUX button repeatedly until the Pandora audio mode is displayed on the screen The controls for the Pandora audio are dis played on the screen Press the audio preset 3 button to pause or play the music Press the audio preset 5 button to select amp thumbs up Press the audio preset 4 button to select 9 thumbs down Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 PANDORA XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 0 49 amp j LHA2269 Models with Navigation System NOTE There is a limit of six skips per station per hour If a 9
158. vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufacturer s recommendations when using their product SNOW PLOW AWARNING Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle handling This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified governm
159. vehicle fluid Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component har nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail able See Owner s Manual Service Manual or der information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS Aa N D 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 WDI0630 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself Battery Fuse fusible link box Transmission dipstick Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Windshield washer fluid reservoir Air cleaner Drive belt location 9 Radiator cap 10 Power steering fluid reservoir 11 Engine oil dipstick 12 Engine coolant reservoir NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity ONDION ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine coolin
160. vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors D or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation t LPD0446 Type A Type A With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion press the button as described To turn off the anti glare feature press the button The indicator light will turn off To turn on the anti glare feature press the button again The indicator light will turn on The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating For more information about the compass and compass features 2 if so equipped see Compass display in the Instruments and con trols section of this manual 7 A LPD0447 Type B Type B With the ignition switch in the ON position press the button as described To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the D button The indicator light will turn off To turn on the automatic anti glare feature press the button again The indicator light will turn on The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating Pre driving che
161. warning Parking brake warning N 0o 0 A model Cruise main switch indicator if so equipped Cruise set switch indicator if so equipped Transfer 4LO position indicator PYZ 8 4WD shift indicator EXzz model 9 Automatic transmission position indicator 10 Loose fuel cap warning 11 Check tire pressure warning Instruments and controls 2 23 Door open warning This warning illuminates when a door has been opened and the engine is running Low fuel warning This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty Low windshield washer fluid warning This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Parking brake warning This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven Cruise main switch indicator if so equipped This indicator illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed The indicator turns off when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator illuminates the cruise control system is operational 2 24 Instruments and controls Cruise set switch ind
162. when using the 4LO position 4 wheel drive vehicles When added traction is required activate the E Lock system by pushing the switch ON See Electronic locking rear differential E Lock sys tem switch in the Instruments and Controls section Once the system fully engages the indi cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON When the system is activated both rear wheels will engage providing added traction The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to engage the system and the system will only engage up to approximately 4 MPH 7 km h Once the vehicle is free the system should be turned OFF and driving resumed The Anti Lock Brake ABS system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON Also the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is disabled and the VDC light illuminates when the E Lock system is ON Starting and driving 5 29 A WARNING e Never leave the E Lock system ON when driving on paved or hard surfaced roads Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury After us ing the E Lock system to free the ve hicle turn the system OFF Use the E Lock system only when free ing a stuck vehicle Try the 4LO position before using the E Lock system Never use the E Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice sur face Using the E Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected
163. windshield washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled with filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir Pre mix windshield washer fluid con centrates with water to the manufactur er s recommended levels before pour ing the fluid into the windshield washer reservoir Do not use the windshield washer reservoir to mix the windshield washer fluid concentrate and water REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR if so equipped DEFROSTER SWITCH LIC0488 Type A To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes 0 GY Type B LIC1173 Type C LIC1158 NOTE If the rear power window if so equipped is lowered while the defroster switch is on the rear window defroster will automati cally shut off The heated outside mirrors if so equipped will remain on The rear win dow defroster will automatically turn on when the rear power window is fully closed if the switch is on A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster Instruments and controls 2 29 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
164. with the tailgate down unless equipped with NISSAN s Bed Extender accessory or equivalent in the extended position For proper truck box loading see Vehicle loading information in the Technical and consumer in formation section of this manual AWARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a colli sion people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 LPD2097 Disconnecting the rear camera if so equipped Before removing the tailgate disconnect the rear camera by performing the following 1 Open the tailgate to access the rear camera connector bracket 1 located on the rear sill 2 Remove the connector bracket 2 from the sill by pressing the locking tab inward in the direction shown while pulling the bracket apart 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments w Disconnect the chassis wiring harness 3 by pressing inward on the locking tab in the direction shown while pulling the connec tors apart Hold the connector firmly to pre vent the connector in the chassis harness from falling into the sill Take the chassis plug and bracket from the glove box and connect them t
165. 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground LTIO131 Bumper towing The genuine NISSAN step bumper has provi sions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in the center of the step bumper then remove it to install the trailer hitch ball Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or dead weight ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a load leveling or equalizing hitch A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight hitch weight of your trailer Many ve hicles can t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels This gives stabil
166. 12V OUTLETS WIC1404 WIC0643 2nd row if so equipped Instruments and controls 2 39 LIC0618 Inside center armrest if so equipped The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones The power outlets located on the driver s side of the instrument panel is powered only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON posi tion The power outlets located on the passenger s side of the instrument panel and in the 2nd row are powered only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Open the cap to use a power outlet 2 40 Instruments and controls A CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter See your NISSAN dealer for additional information Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the i
167. 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running Phone char gers GPS DVD players etc Vehicle is not driven regularly and or only driven short distances In these cases the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health DRIVING THE VEHICLE ENGINE PROTECTION MODE The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem perature becomes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer When the engine temperature reaches a certain level The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position Engine power may be reduced The air conditioning cooling function may be automatically turned OFF for a short time the blower will continue to operate Engine power and under some conditions ve hicle speed will decrease Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift
168. 4 26 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets Some air also flows from the defrost outlets 1 Push the gt button to the OFF position for normal heating The indicator light on the VS button will go off C amp will ap pear on the display if so equipped 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the e position 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents 1 Push the V amp gt button to the OFF position The indicator light on the lt button will go off SS will appear on the display if so equipped Turn the air flow control dial to the n position Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost defog the windows T Turn the air flow control dial to the Su position Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position To quickly remove ice or fog from the win dows turn the fan control dial to the right and the temperatur
169. 46 Instruments and controls C3 Medium bin if so equipped Storage bins A WARNING Keep storage bins closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop Push the button to open a storage bin Push the lid up to close LIC1372 Front Type A CUP HOLDERS A CAUTION e Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger e Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident LIC0620 Front Type B Instruments and controls 2 47 d 5 LIC1373 LIC0622 LIC0554 Adjustable if so equipped Armrest if so equipped 2nd row rear of front console Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so if so equipped that the cup is held securely To open the 2nd row cup holders rear of front console lower the lid To close raise the lid 2 48 Instruments and controls LICO556 LICO558 LIC0624 2nd row bench if so equipped Bottle holder Type A Bottle holder Type B A CAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident e Do not use bottle holder for open liquid cont
170. 4LO you may feel a jolt This is not abnormal When the vehicle is stopped after mak ing a turn you may feel a slight jolt after the shift selector is shifted to N or P This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction A CAUTION e When driving straight shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears D1 or D2 for en gine braking Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH 100 km h Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system e Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4LO and 4H while driving Starting and driving 5 27 I 4WD shift indicator light The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the vehicle information display LSD0147 The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to the ON position While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other When the shifting is com pleted the 4WD shift indicator lig
171. 6 14 In case of emergency Rocking a stuck vehicle A WARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Differ ential E Lock System if so equipped Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH 55 km h or above 12 MPH 20 km h if the E Lock System is engaged If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior renes pr eR RR RE 7 2 Washing ussuerwer pue rbi eETUPzeegRRDLERS 7 2 WAXING caer ETT 7 2 Removing Spots 0 02 6 e eee eee eee eee 7 3 Underbody 1 scusse detiene Rena Rare Gui 7 3 CIC 7 8 Aluminum alloy wheels 0000s eee eee 7 3 Chrome parts
172. Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road in a safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load jo Tongue load Total trailer load Tongue load INS ae x 100 10 to 15 WTIO0160 Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib uting hitch keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu facturer The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow ing Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load King pin load When using a 5th wheel hitch keep the tongue load between 15 25 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum king pin load limits shown in the following Towing Load Specification chart If the king pin load becomes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper king pin load Technical and consumer information 9 25 C3 Eds 3 j Gross vehicle weight EL C ee Pres Gross axle weight CA0036 Maximum Gross Vehicle Wei
173. D CAPACITY Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label See Measurement of weights later in this section Technical and consumer information 9 13 Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration 9 14 Technical and consumer information Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Occupants RR CO IL 150 Ib x 2 300lb 30 Ib x 2 60 ib E 70kg 135kg i4 kg 27 kg 135 kg Luggage Trailer Tongue Weight Occupants RR 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib Luggage nm 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg 472 kg Occupants Luggage Load limit Remaining available 640 kg oad capacity 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 150 Ib 500 Ib 70 kg 340 kg
174. DER INFORMATION Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle This manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer ships Genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals can also be purchased For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals contact 1 800 247 5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual for this model year and prior please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone number and loca tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you Technical and consumer information 9 43 MEMO 9 44 Technical and consumer information 10 Index 4WD warning light 2 16 A Active brake limited slip ABLS system 5 34 Adjusting pedal position 3 14 Air bag See supplemental restraint System 4 6 fy a Gok echo uses Rue ed 1 47 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact airbag system 1 54 Air bag warning labels s 1 61 Air bag warning light 1 62 2 18 Air cleaner housing filler
175. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling Keep battery out of the reach of children Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level WDIO0224 1 Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case WDIO0529 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessa
176. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage Technical and consumer information 9 31 Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 907 kg Class II hitch Class Il trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3 500 Ib 1 587 kg Class III hitch Class Ill trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg 9 32 Technical and consumer information Class IV hitch Class IV trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10 000 Ib 4 535 kg A weight distributing hitch should be used to t
177. M button is pressed while the com pact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows RDM Normal RDM Tracks from the disc that is currently play ing will be played randomly A CD EJECT button When the amp button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off CD IN indicator CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on 4 46 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 12 Station select 1 6 buttons a 13 RDM button 14 RPT button E Nn wo gt a 15 DISP button 16 VOL volume knob PWR power button 39 mme M SON 17 CD AUX button _ _ _ _ gt 18 FM AM button FM AM lemi P Lal M4 SEEKCAT gt gt I 18 LI ipod CD AUX DISP MENU BACK a Gea r No satellite radio reception is available when the XM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service PWR subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam LHA2501 1 amp CD eject button 7 wb CAT button 2 XM button 8 BACK button 3 CD insert slot 9 iPod MENU button 4 Display
178. Maintenance and do it yourself e If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics affect the VDC system and or interference with the brake discs Such interference can lead to decreased braking effi ciency and or early brake pad wear Re fer to Wheels and tires in the Techni cal and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions e When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet Exc3 Four wheel drive models A CAUTION Always use tires of the
179. ON NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 0000 esses ess 8 2 General maintenance ssseseeseesesss 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautions 00 cece eee eee 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system e een 8 7 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Changing engine coolant 055 8 8 eee EE 8 9 Checking engine oil level 0 085 8 9 Changing engine oil lssseseeeeesesse 8 10 Changing engine oil filter 0 8 11 5 speed automatic transmission fluid 8 11 Power steering fluid 26 50 0000 ce eee e eee eee 8 12 Brake fluid sesiRI
180. R Reed 4 115 Ending a call 5 52 5222 e edi uboSis ie hA 4 115 Text messaging socer ee Skew ae ee 4 115 Bluetooth settings 0 020s eee eene 4 117 Phone settings siue ditto oer oieee ia 4 118 NISSAN Voice Recognition System if so equipped 2 cece cee eee eee 4 119 Using the system hb eae 4 119 System features 0 0c eto e eee eee 4 121 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System voice commands soree nE agre eee RARE 4 122 Navigation System voice commands 4 122 Audio system voice commands sss 4 123 Information voice commands 4 124 Help voice commands 2 000ee scenes 4 124 Troubleshooting guide sess 4 125 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped A WARNING e Positioning of the heating or air condi tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or der that full attention may be given to the driving operation e Do not disassemble or modify this sys tem If you do it may result in accidents fire or electrical shock Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock 10 VOL In case you notice any foreign object in 3 the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop
181. RNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flam mable and could cause serious per sonal injury e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler cap or filling the tank e Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regu lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research oc tane number 91 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For the best starting and vehicle driveability re sults do not continually switch between E 85 and unleaded regular gasoline If you must switch fuels NISSAN recommends the following do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full add more than 5 gallons of fuel operate the vehicle immediately after refuel ing for a period of at least 5 minutes NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard start ing and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuit able for use when ambient temperatures fall be low O F 18 C In the range of O F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for you engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesita tions until the engine is fully warmed up Technical and consumer inform
182. SAN Voice Recognition observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor rectly Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 3 5 sec onds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words VOICE RECOGNITION BI ll Call a name Information Navigation Audio 5 Say Command LHA2281 SYSTEM FEATURES NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol lowing systems Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Navigation Audio Information For additional information on the navigation sys tem see the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Either zero or oh can be used for a9 Phone numbers Speak phone numbers according to the following example For 1 800 662 6200 say dial number and then speak the phone number in any of the following formats one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh one eight zero zero six six two six two oh
183. SSAN hitches ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport utility vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer e The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper e Do not use axle mounted hitches Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted e When towing with the hitch ball mounted to the rear bumper do not make sharp turns The trailer may con tact the bumper and cause damage to the bumper or trailer When towing a 5th wheel trailer do not make sharp turns while driving or back ing The trailer may contact the vehicle and cause damage to both the trailer and vehicle Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to the vehicle bumper or axle The safety chains c
184. The alarm automatically turns off after a pe riod of time However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door with the key or by pressing the fj button on the keyfob The alarm is activated by opening a door without using the key or keyfob even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door with the key or by pressing the fj button on the keyfob NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM if so equipped The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 sec onds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices
185. The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure 8 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless 2 The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle TYPES OF TIRES A WARNING e When changing o
186. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See Child re straints later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Teth ers for CHildren system or with the vehicle seat belt See Child restraints later in this section for more information NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are o
187. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off road use As with other vehicles with features of this type fail ure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On pavement and off road driving precautions and Avoid ing collision and rollover and Driving safety precautions in the Starting and driving section of this manual MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways A WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk
188. Track Repeat the current track will be re peated 1 Folder Repeat the current folder will be re peated OFF No repeat play pattern is applied The indi cator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied TUNE SCROLL knob If there are multiple folders with audio files on the USB device turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to change folders Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder If there is only one folder of audio files on the USB device turning the TUNE SCROLL knob in either direction will re turn to the first track on the USB device 4 60 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA2455 USB INTERFACE models with Navigation System Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located inside the center console Insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio files on the stor age device can be played through the vehicle s audio system Audio file operation AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode If the system has
189. XXX kPa XX PSI POUR D AUTRES PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI oar Exaudi OUE DE SECOURS PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI INFORMATION AU MANUEL DU CONDUCTEUR LDI0485 Tire and loading information label Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle Vehicle load limit See loading infor mation in the Technical and con sumer information section Original tire size The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds The recom mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal ance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR 8 Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section 6 Spare tire size Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 LDI0393 Checking tire pressure 1 2 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 8 36 Mainten
190. a tion label LTIO102 SECURING THE LOAD For your convenience tie down hooks are placed at each corner of the truck box These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box Technical and consumer information 9 15 A WARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could occur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury 9 16 Technical and consumer information LTIO107 1 Side channels 2 Header channel 3 Channel sections 4 Floor channels UTILI TRACK CHANNEL SYSTEM if so equipped A WARNING Properly install and tighten the tie down cleats into the Utili track chan nel system Also do not attach any rope or straps directly to the channel Failure to properly install the tie down cleats or attaching ropes or straps directly to the channel can cause the cargo to become unsecured In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause per sonal injury e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a s
191. ack ing up The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section Inclement weather may af fect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it mis aligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure ment of obstacles or false alarms The Rear Sonar System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift selector is in R Reverse The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The RSS detects obstacles up to 5 9 feet 1 8 m from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a station
192. ack on the disc is played If the last track in a folder of an MP3 WMA CD is skipped the first track of the next folder is played TUNE SCROLL knob MP3 WMA CD only If an MP3 WMA CD with multiple folders is play ing turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to change folders Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while a com pact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows CD 1 Track Repeat OFF l SEEK CAT button CD with MP3 or WMA 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat OFF 1 Track Repeat the current track will be re peated 1 Folder Repeat the current folder will be re peated OFF No repeat play pattern is applied The indi cator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied RDM button When the RDM button is pressed while a com pact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows CD 1 Disc Random 9 OFF CD with MP3 or WMA 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random OFF 1 Disc Random all tracks on the disc will be played randomly 1 Folder Random all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly OFF No random play pattern is applied The indicator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applie
193. aes ig anal EM Maximum Tongue load 2 8 950 Ib 940 Ib 920 Ib 940 Ib 930 Ib 930 Ib 930 Ib 910 Ib Maximum King pin load 1 425 Ib 1 410 Ib 1 380 Ib 1 410 Ib 1 395 Ib 1 395 Ib 1 395 Ib 1 365 Ib ome em Ge Gu ee Go o Ge C Grew Maximum Gross Combined 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib eun cmm s uus 15292 eee Towing load specification chart with tow package long wheel base UL 9 1 SV Maximum Towing 9 300 Ib 4 218 kg 9 100 Ib 4 127 kg Capacity 1 2 8 Maximum Tongue load 2 3 930 Ib 422 kg 910 Ib 413 kg Maximum King pin load 1 395 Ib 633 kg 1 365 Ib 619 kg Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15 100 Ib 6 848 kg 15 100 Ib 6 848 kg 9 28 Technical and consumer information Towing load specification chart without tow package short wheel base Dr Lee ee ee ee 55971 55 737 Maximum Towing 7 400 Ib 7 400 Ib 7 400 Ib 7 4001b 7 100 1b 7 4001b 7 4001b 7 3001b 7 3001b 7 000 Ib capacity 1 2 3 3 356 kg 8 356 kg 3 356 kg 8 356 kg 3 220 kg 8 356 kg 3 356 kg 3 111 kg 3 111 kg 3 175 kg 336 kg 336 kg 336 kg 336 kg 322 kg 336 kg 336 kg 311 kg 311 kg 318 kg 504 kg 504 kg 504kg 504kg 483kg 504kg 504kg 496kg 496kg 476 kg 5 806 kg 5 806 kg 5 806 kg 5 806 kg
194. ag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri ous personal injury e Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected Unauthor ized electrical test equipment and prob ing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual LRS2094 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain and roll over air bags are located in the side roof rails These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occupants However all of the information cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bag
195. ained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system Technical and consumer information 9 7 SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VK56DE Type Oylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC 8 cylinder V block Slanted at 90 in mm 3 858 x 3 622 98 x 92 cu in cm 338 78 5 552 1 8 7 3 6 5 4 2 Idle speed A T in N position Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle speed CO at idle No adjustment is necessary Spark plug Spark plug gap Nominal Camshaft operation This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 9 8 Technical and consumer information Standard Model FFV Model DILFR5A 1 1 DILFR5A 11D in mm 0 043 1 1 Timing chain WHEELS AND TIRES Wheels Tires Spare tire 18 x 8 0JJ 20 x 8 0JJ P265 70R18 P275 70R18 P275 60R20 Full size DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Overall length Short wheel base SWB in mm 224 6 5 704 Long wheel base LWB in mm 244 3 6 204 Overall width in mm 79 5 2 019 Overall height King Cab SWB 4x2 S SV in mm 74 6 1 896 4x4 S SV in mm 76 1 1 934 4x4 Pro AX in mm 76 6 1 946 King Cab LWB 4x2 S SV in mm 74 4 1 891 4x4 S SV in mm 76 0 1 931 Crew Cab SWB 4x2 S SV in mm 74 7 1 898 4x2 SL in mm
196. ainers Instruments and controls 2 49 LIC0626 LICO625 GROCERY HOOKS if so equipped The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic grocery bags to hang side by side To access the grocery hooks fold up the rear bench seat See Folding the rear bench seat in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section earlier in this manual A CAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 18 Ibs 8 kg to a single grocery hook 2 50 Instruments and controls LOCKABLE BEDSIDE STORAGE COMPARTMENT if so equipped To access the bedside storage compartment hold the key hole cover open and insert the master key Turn the key clockwise to unlock the lid The tray inside the bedside storage compartment is adjustable The bedside storage compartment will automati cally lock when the lid is closed You do not need to use the key A CAUTION e Do notstore a total load of more than 22 Ibs 10 kg inside the storage compartment e Do not use the storage compartment or storage compartment lid as a step Do ing so may damage them WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS if so equipped A WARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unk
197. air bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in flated for a short time The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 59 A WARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag in
198. al control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re cent Calls lists To re activate Voice Recognition exit the manual control mode by pressing and holding the PHONE END f z t button At that time pressing the PHONE SEND CT d button will start the Hands Free Phone System BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 109 Q Bluetooth LHA2453 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone con
199. amage to driveline components from extended use Do not drive over 12 MPH 20 km h when the system is engaged Doing so could result in possible damage to the driveline Do not turn on the E lock system while the tires are spinning Doing so could damage drivetrain components POWER INVERTER SWITCH if so equipped LIC2075 To use the outlets for devices that require 120v power place the ignition in the ON position and push the power inverter switch The 400W or 150W on the switch will illuminate according to the mode selected Only the 150W is available when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or while the vehicle is being driven For more information on using devices that require the power inverter switch activated see 120v outlets later in this section A CAUTION Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Do not attempt to use this while driving Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory doing so could significantly drain the battery of your vehicle Instruments and controls 2 37 REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH if so equipped 9 OFF LICO471 AWARNING The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly The rear sonar system
200. an be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights A CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer dealer Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7 pin trailer harness connector If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4 pin connector an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle Adapters are available at NISSAN deal ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail ers Trailer brakes When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used However most states require a sep
201. anane en e oes es ae bee a Ae e x dts 3 2 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys if so equipped srrrisesi inepti ea hiaan 3 2 Door oed r LU a A 3 3 Locking With Koyi sse ses i iere ret det dne 3 3 Locking with inside lock knob 008 3 4 Locking with power door lock switch if so equipped 6 cece eee eee 3 4 Wide Open doors if so equipped 3 5 Automatic door locks if so equipped 3 6 Child safety rear door lock Crew Cab models only sssssususss 3 7 Remote keyless entry system if so equipped 3 7 How to use remote keyless entry system 3 8 Hood nsus utu pP Eee Et E Eure d ers 3 11 Fuel fillet dO scien aps ate REIR eR RR RE 3 12 Fuel ANG CAD s nnL ure ttr LEE ERE 3 12 Steering Wheel i ssec xara et hber RR RU ERA 3 14 Tilt operation 2cuiec liil nc e lb m ner 3 14 Pedal position adjustment if so equipped 3 14 SUN VISOS ss bee rb FUR Maen Y BOR ese ond 3 15 Vanity mirrors if so equipped sssssse 3 15 uoc 3 16 Rearview mirror if so equipped sss 3 16 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror if so equipped ricis erreen esi eee eee eee 3 16 Outside MINOIS senes Sac blond Ree 3 18 Tr ck DOW EMPIRE 3 21 Tailgate sexu dee E genet 3 21 Tie down hooks orem en 3 25 Automatic drive positioner if so equipped 3 25 Memory storage function 0 eee eee 3 26 Enitry e
202. ance and do it yourself 3 Remove the gauge 4 Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed Install the valve stem cap Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Front Original Tire P265 70R18 P275 70R18 P275 60R20 Rear Original Tire P265 70R18 P275 70R18 P275 60R20 Spare Tire P265 70R18 P275 70R18 P275 60R20 250 kPa 36 PSI 250 kPa 36 PSI 250 kPa 36 PSI WDIO0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall 1 P215 65R15 95H 65 3 Example Tire size example P215 65R15 95H P The P indicates the tire is de signed for passenger vehicles not all tires have this information 2 Three digit number 215 This num ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side wa
203. and or connectors to dry completely before connecting the USB device Large video podcast files cause slow re sponses in the iPod9 The vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it will Soon recover If the iPod automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode the vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it will soon recover Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod The iPod nano 1st Generation may re main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation In this case please manually reset the iPod The iPod nano 2nd Generation will con tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon nected during a seek operation Anincorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod nano 2nd generation f you are using an iPod 3rd Generation with Dock connector do not use very long names for the song title album name or artist name to avoid the iPod resetting itself iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Bluetooth streaming audio if so equipped Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be recognized by the in vehicle audio system t is necessary to set up the wireless con nection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio Monitor cl
204. annot be placed in the LOCK position 5 10 Starting and driving To remove the key from the ignition switch 1 Shift the shift selector to the P Park posi tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi tion 2 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch If the shift selector is shifted to the P Park position after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position proceed as follows to remove the key 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position 2 Place the ignition switch slightly toward the ON position 3 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 4 Remove the key The shift selector is designed so it cannot move out of P Park and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch The shift selector can be moved if the igni tion switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ON positions The OFF position is indicated by a 1 on the ignition switch For models without NISSAN vehicle immo bilizer system when the ignition switch is in the OFF position the steering wheel is not locked In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position To lock t
205. any simi lar materials If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running Instruments and controls 2 35 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL E Lock SYSTEM SWITCH if so equipped E 35 OFF LIC1548 LIC0729 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dy namic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section 2 36 Instruments and controls The Electronic Locking Rear Differential E Lock System can help provide added traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck To activate the E Lock system the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position 4 wheel drive vehicles the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4 MPH 7 km h
206. ap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care A CAUTION Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotted Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps r
207. ar equip ment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and per sonal computers If a keyfob is lost or stolen NISSAN rec ommends erasing the ID code of that key fob This will prevent the keyfob from un authorized use to unlock the vehicle For information regarding the erasing proce dure please contact a NISSAN dealer 7 a LPD0209 HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors Close all windows Remove the key from the ignition switch Close the hood and all doors Press the button on the keyfob All the doors lock The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked A OO ND When the button is pressed with all doors locked the hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked f a door is open and you press the button the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash The horn may or may not beep For vehicles without navigation system refer to Silencing the horn beep feature later in this section For ve hicles with navigation system refer to How to use the setting button in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section later in this manual LPD0210 Unlocking doors Press the 9 button on the keyfob once Only the driver s door un
208. arate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow Several types of braking systems are available Surge Brakes The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers In this type of system there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer Technical and consumer information 9 33 Electric Trailer Brakes Electric braking sys tems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller special brake sensing module If electric trailer brakes are used see Electric trailer brake controller in this section Have a professional supplier of towing equip ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing A WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system 9 34 Technical and consumer information BEND LTIO117 example Electric trailer brake controller Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller Your vehicl
209. ard facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment re moval and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0680 Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle
210. arly 180 to allow access to the rear of the cab 1 Open the driver s or passenger s door 2 From the outside pull the door handle 1 toward you Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 LPD0267 LPD0265 From the inside pull the inside door handle to ward you The door will unlock automatically 3 Open the door to the desired position AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS if so equipped All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P Park posi tion 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments The automatic unlock function can be de activated or activated To deactivate or acti vate the automatic door unlock system perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 push and hold the power door lock switch to the 8 position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds 4 When activated the hazard indicator will flash twice When deactivated the hazard indicator will flash once 5 The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change When the automatic door unlock system is deac tivated the doors do not unlock when the trans mission is placed in the P Park position To unlock the door manually use the inside lock knob or the power do
211. ary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the sys tem detects an object approaching the tone will sound again The RSS automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is ON The RSS OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition must be ON and the shift selector in R Reverse An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a mal function in the RSS Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bum per fascia free from snow ice and large accumu lations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob if so equipped ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If
212. assengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by a passenger the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten sion It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 19 A WARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts Tounfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separa
213. at will slide backward When the key is removed from the ignition switch and the driver s door is opened When the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to LOCK with the driver s door open The driver s seat will return to the previous posi tion When the key is inserted into the ignition Switch and the driver s door is closed When the driver s door is closed with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P Park position The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed For vehicles with a navigation system see Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section of this manual For vehicles without navigation system see your NISSAN dealer Restarting the entry exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will be disabled Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the entry exit function You can also restart the entry exit function using the following proce dure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position The entry exit function should now work properly Pre driving checks and adjus
214. atedly until the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds NOTE If the clock is enabled pressing the MENU button will change the mode as follows BAS TRE FAD BAL CLOCK Hour adjustment Minute adjustment Audio BAS For more information on setting the clock see Clock set later in this section Clock operation Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis played use the SEEK button to turn the clock display on CLK ON or off CLK OFF Clock set If the clock is not displayed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position you need to select the CLK ON mode Press the MENU but ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed Use the SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode 1 Press the MENU button repeatedly until CLOCK mode appears press the SEEK button until CLK ON appears 2 Press the MENU button again the hours will start flashing 3 Press the SEEK button M or gt I to adjust the hour 4 Press the MENU button again the display will switch to the minute adjustment mode 5 The minutes will start flashing Press SEEK button M or Pl 6 Press the MENU button again to exit the clock set mode to adjust the minutes The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds or press the MENU button again to return to the regular clock display 4 44 Monitor climate audio phone and voice r
215. ation 9 5 Fuel consumption Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gal lon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your fuel mileage to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with etha nol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts A CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle and may also affect the warranty coverage Maintenance If you operate your vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the correct maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide A CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability 9 6 Technical and consumer information API certification mark API service symbol LTI2024 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certificatio
216. atures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts Starting and driving 5 39 MEMO 5 40 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Hazard warning flasher switch 00 0005 6 2 Flat tifG scri eme ir dm E heh E ea ence 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Changing a flat tire esses 6 3 Jump Stanin see esto estt se ete tea ser esas 6 8 Push starting 2 sem hr er x et 6 10 If your vehicle overheatS 6 000 cece eee eee 6 10 Towing your vehicle sees 6 11 Towing recommended by NISSAN 6 12 Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle 6 13 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH P LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash A WARNING e If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on 6 2 In case of emergency The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position S
217. ay Dial to call the number of the phonebook entry Say Send Text to send a text message to the number of the phonebook entry Say Next Entry to skip to the next alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook where the same op tions will then be available Recent Calls The system prompts for an additional com mand Say Missed Calls Incoming Calls or Outgoing Calls to display a list of such calls on the screen Speak the number of the entry displayed on the screen to dial that number or say Next Page to view entries on the next page if available Redial Redials the last called number Read Text 4 122 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Reads an incoming text message For more information about text messaging with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section Send Text Sends a text message For more information about text messaging with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section Select Phone The system replies Please use manual con trols to continue Use manual controls to change the active phone from among the listed phones connected to the vehicle For more information about the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation Sys tem in this section
218. back in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park position FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Forward and backward Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seat in position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 LRS0427 LRS0633 Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the sw
219. be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 7 Checkto make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 1 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions LLL WRS0788 Forward facing web mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors If the child restraint is equipped with a
220. be disabled and the VDC light will illuminate when the electronic locking rear differential E lock system switch if so equipped is turned on and the E lock system is engaged If the E lock system disengages or the switch is turned off the VDC system will be enabled and the VDC light will turn off AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY if so equipped WIC1248 o Ode INFO WIC1249 The vehicle information display 1 is located to the left of the speedometer It displays such items as automatic transmission position indicator cruise control system information if so equipped some indicators and warnings HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Press t
221. been turned off while the USB memory was playing push the ON OFF VOL control knob to restart the USB memory e USB XXXXXXXX D XXXXXXXX d XXXXXXXX Q xxx Browse LHA1496 Play information Information about the audio files being played is shown on the display screen of the vehicle s audio system Touch Browse to display the list of folders and files on the USB device Touch the name of a song on the screen to begin playing that song lt lt Press the M4 button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the M4 button sev eral times to skip backward several tracks l Seeking buttons Press the PP button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the PP button several times to skip for ward several tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played Random and repeat play mode While files on a USB device are playing the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly Random Touch the Random key to apply a random play pattern to the USB device When the random mode is active the 2Xi iconis displayed to the left of the song title or album name to denote which random pattern is applied To cancel Ran dom mode touch the Random key until no gt iconis displayed R
222. begins from low to high frequencies or high to low frequencies depending on which button is pressed and stops at the next broadcasting sta tion Once the highest broadcasting station is reached the radio continues in the seek mode at the lowest broadcasting station Station memory operations 18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of AM or FM stations 1 Press the PRESET A B C button to change between storage banks The radio displays the icon A B or C to indicate which set of presets are active 2 Tune to the desired station using manual TUNE or SEEK tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard The radio mutes when the select button is pressed 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Compact disc CD player operation If the radio is already operating it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play CD button When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing the radio turns off and the last used compact disc starts to play pp TUNE rewind and fast forward buttons lt lt When the
223. bjects on the moonroof or surrounding area Instruments and controls 2 55 Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof 2 56 Instruments and controls INTERIOR LIGHT LICO585 Type A The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position the interior lights illuminate regardless of door posi tion The lights will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position When the switch is in the DOOR or normal operation position the interior lights puddle lights if so equipped and cargo light will stay on for a period of time when LIC0630 Type B The doors are unlocked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position The driver s door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed The lights will turn off while the timer is activated when The driver s door is locked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch The ignition switch is turned ON When the switch is in the OFF position the interior lights do not illuminate regardless of door
224. ble beep is played to indicate you have exited the system f you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the ae button on the steering wheel To use the system faster you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu For example press the amp button and after the tone say Call Redial You can also use the button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once See List of voice commands and During a call in this section for more information h PHONE END While the voice recognition sys tem is active press and hold the 4 button for 5 seconds to quit the voice recognition system LHA2454 at any time CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel amp F 4 Tuning switch While using the voice recognition system tilt the tuning switch up or PHONE SEND down to manually control the phone system Press the l button to initiate CONNECTING PROCEDURE a VR session or answer an incom ing call To connect a phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System 1 Press the SETTING button Monitor climate au
225. book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call Speak Digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number in this section for more details Special Number C For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Number When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a redial number does not exist the system announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Call Back Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands Help The system announces the avail able
226. brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient if both the brake warning light and the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminate it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the brake system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly Avoid high speed driv ing and abrupt braking See Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light in this section Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running it may indicate the charging system is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately A CAUTION e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing So will bypass the variable control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section later in this manual e Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or missing HA WE Engine oil pressure low Engine coolant temperature high warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high engine coolant temperature If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine and allow it to cool If the light remains on after checking the oil and coo
227. braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles AWARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds abo
228. btain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraints earlier in this section If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0915 Forward Facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manu facturer s instructions for seat belt routing WRS0916 Forward Facing step 4 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 WRS0917 Forward Facing step 5 5 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt
229. but ton Bluetooth Select On or Off to turn the vehicle s Bluetooth system on or off Add Phone or Device To connect a phone to the system see Connecting procedure in this section Delete Phone or Device Select to delete a phone from the displayed list The system will ask to confirm before deleting the phone Replace Phone Select to replace a phone from the displayed list When a selection is made the system will ask to confirm before proceeding The recorded phonebook for the phone being deleted will be saved as long as the new phone s phonebook is the same as the old phone s phonebook Select Phone or Device Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list Show Incoming Calls Select Driver Only to have incoming call information displayed only in the vehicle in formation display Select Both to have in coming call information displayed in both the vehicle information display and the center display screen Phonebook Download Select to turn on or off the automatic down load of a connected phone s phonebook Text Message Select to turn on or off the vehicle s text messaging feature 4 108 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems New Text Sound Select to adjust the volume of the sound that plays when a new text is received by a phone connected to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System The setting all the way to the left indicates that the
230. cally Lane change signal 2 Tosignal a lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch The turn signal will flash three times automati cally FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 2 position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position if so equipped the head lights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the 2D position To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected Instruments and controls 2 33 HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCH if so equipped HEATED SEATS if so equipped LIC2051 CARGO LAMP LIC0616 J a pM al LO WIC1441 To sound the horn push near the horn icon of the steering wheel AA WARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury 2 34 Instruments and controls To turn on the cargo lamp push the switch down to the ON position The tailgate lights if so equipped
231. cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training DO NOT release until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing indi cates successful training Proceed with Programming HomeLink step 3 to complete If the device was unplugged during the pro gramming procedure remember to plug it back in when programming is completed OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver after it is programmed can be used to activate the pro grammed device To operate simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The amber indica tor light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up
232. caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents A CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the tr
233. cedure the procedure will be cancelled Main Menu Connect phone Add phone Initiate from handset C Name phone D 1 Press the button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands 2 Say Connect phone The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Add phone B The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset C The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Own er s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones When prompted for a Passkey code enter 1234 from the handset The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed The system asks you to say a name for the phone D If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call amp Phone Number Speak the digits C Dial 1 Press the button on the steering wheel A tone will sound 2 Say Call The system acknowledges the command and a
234. ch as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an chors are obstructed 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0748 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors LRS0395 LATCH lower anchor point locations LRS0661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer LRS0662 LATCH rigid mounted attachment When installing a child restraint carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 LRS0393 Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located under the rear window
235. cks and adjustments 3 17 For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instruments and controls section of this manual For information on the compass and compass features 2 see Compass display in the In struments and controls section of this manual OUTSIDE MIRRORS A WARNING Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0170 e LPD0237 Manual control type if so equipped The outside mirror can be moved in any direction for a better rear view Electric control type if so equipped The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Move the small switch 1 to select the right or left mirror Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch 2 A E LPD0279 Trailer tow mirrors if so equipped A WARNING Objects viewed in the convex portion of the trailer tow mirror are closer than they appear Be careful when changing lanes or turning Using only the convex mirror could cause an accident Use t
236. cle s speakers POls powered Information by Google Google X Weather amp Send To Car Voice LHA2253 fk SETTINGS ew 7 g Bluetooth LHA2248 Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle follow the procedure below 1 Press the MENU button 2 Select the Settings key 4 68 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 Select the Phone amp Bluetooth key BLUETOOTH SETUP Phone Settings Connect New Device Select Connected Device Replace Connected Device Delete Connected Device LHA2265 4 Select the Connect New Device key 5 The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recom mended cellular phones Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode press the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis played on the screen PANDORA AUDIO United States only if so equipped The vehicle s audio system is capable of playing audio streaming through a compatible USB connected audio device
237. commands Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call e Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For example if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Say star for Say pound for Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session To reconnect the call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free System press the amp button Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 91
238. control ON OFF switch is pushed ON while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch To prop erly set the cruise control system use the following procedures A WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions e When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed e On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch on The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control Starting and driving 5 21 To cancel the preset spee
239. cribed in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Capacity Approximate Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 28 gal 23 1 4 gal 105 8 See Fuel Recommendation without Flexible Fuel Vehicle Option or Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Fuel Recommendation later in this section Engine oil Brain and Refill With oil filter change 6 7 8 qt 5 3 4 qt 6 5 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 1 Without oil filter change 6 1 2 qt 5 1 2 qt 6 2 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 Cooling system With reservoir 3 1 4 gal 2 5 8 gal 12 2 Pre diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the in Power steering fluid PSF structions in the Maintenance and do it Brake fluid yourself section Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF 2 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 3 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 4 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base HFC 134a R 134a 5 Air conditioning system oil Genuine NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 5 Transfer fluid 2 1 8 qt 1 3 4 qt 2 0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended 6 Front final drive oil 3 3 8 pt 2 7 8 pt 1 6 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL 5 80W 90 or API GL 5 Viscosi
240. ctor earlier in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 9 OFF LRS0865 7 If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light ae may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion contains important information concerning the following systems Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact and roll over supplemental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and right front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and right front passenger in certain side impact collisions The side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Roof mounted curtain side impact and rol
241. d Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h BREAK IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended pe
242. d CD AUX button The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cas sette tape CD player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the CD AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack The CD AUX button is also used to switch the audio system to a source plugged into the USB input jack in the center console When a device is plugged into the AUX IN jack while another de vice is plugged into the USB input jack the CD AUX button is used to toggle between the two functions For more information about the USB input jack see USB interface models without Navigation System in this section 44 EJECT button When the button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 When the button is pressed twice with a compact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal If the disc 1 2 3 4 is not removed within 20 seconds the disc will c r reload r C 5 Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system see iPod player op eration without Navigation System in this sec For more information about the Bluetooth audio 8 interface available with this system see Bluetooth streami
243. d Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving WSD0188 Manual shift mode if so equipped When the manual shift mode button A is pressed while driving the transmission enters the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be selected manually In the manual shift mode the shift range is dis played on the position indicator in the meter After pressing the manual shift mode button the posi tion indicator first displays M4 Fourth Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 M2 M3 M4 D Starting and driving 5 17 M4 Fourth For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 M2 M3 M4 M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter M3 Third Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 M2 M3 MS will be displayed on the position indicator in the
244. d use one of the following three methods Pushthe CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out Push the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the vehicle information display go out The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the vehicle information display goes out if you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you move the shift selector to N Neutral To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch 5 22 Starting and driving Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired spee
245. d 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on When the warning light comes on the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in 4H Be especially careful when driving If corresponding parts are malfunctioning the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted e Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads Driv ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise tire wear and increased fuel consumption If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads inthe4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the automatic transmission shift selector to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD e If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL E Lock SYSTEM if so equipped The E Lock system can provide additional trac tion and should only be used when a vehicle has become or is becoming stuck This system oper ates by electronically locking the two rear drive wheels together allowing them to turn at the same speed The system is used when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even
246. d antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Bosch VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section OBluetooth Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 111 CONNECTING PROCEDURE 1 Press the MENU button on the control panel POIs powered Information by Google Google Send To Car z Voice Settings E SETTINGS g Bluetooth LHA2253 LHA2248 2 Select the Settings key 4 112 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recog
247. d held for two seconds Reset all settings memory Select the Reset All Settings Memory key to re turn all settings to default and to clear the memory Info For information about the Info key see the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual XM For XM setup refer to Audio system in this section 12 BUTTON To change the display brightness press the XE button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display If no operation is performed within 5 seconds the display will return to the previous display Press and hold the X 2 button for more than two seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on REARVIEW MONITOR if so equipped When the shift selector is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows a rearward view from the vehicle A WARNING e The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly Objects viewed in the RearView Moni tor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used e Make sure that the trunk is securely
248. d is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspections see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 FUSES 2 i i LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI2153 Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes ENGINE COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Ne
249. d to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL OR
250. dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents 1 Press the VS button to the OFF position The indicator light on the gt button will go off 2 Press the j air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost defog the windows Turn the air flow control dial to the SU position Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position To quickly remove ice or fog from the win dows turn the fan control dial to the right and the temperature control to the full HOT position When the St position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the A C button will not come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the ve hicle is shut off the fan is turned off or the A C button is used to turn off the compres sor even if the air flow control dial is turned to a position other than the Sg position This deh
251. dicator light on the A C button will not come on and A C will not appear on the display if so equipped if the outside tem perature is more than 36 F 2 C If in the mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the vehicle is shut off This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield Thez amp mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield This improves heater operation AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push inthe A C button to activate the air conditioner When the air condi tioner is on cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air 1 Push the amp 2 button to the OFF position 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the vd position 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Push the A C button The indicator light onthe A C button will come on A C will appear on the display if so equipped 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position
252. dio phone and voice recognition systems 4 101 Bluetooth Bass Treble Balance Fade LHA2257 Setting Bluetooth Bluetooth Add phone or Device Delete Phone or Device Replace phone NEM Select phone or Device LHA2274 2 Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to select Bluetooth and then press the ENTER but ton 3 Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to select Add Phone or Device and then press the ENTER button 4 When a message with a PIN appears on the Screen operate the Bluetooth phone to enter the PIN The connecting procedure varies according to each phone See the phone s Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for in structions on connecting recommended cellular phones 4 102 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems VOICE COMMANDS Voice commands can be used to operate the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Press the button and say Phone to bring up the phone command menu The available options are Call Phonebook Recent Calls Send Text Read Text Select Phone Call For more information on the Call command see Making a call in this section Phonebook The following commands are available under Phonebook aname Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a list of options for that phonebook entry The system will say
253. ditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front Passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Sit upright and well back ARS1133 ARS1041 A WARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 49 ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS 1044 AA WARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly re strained Pre teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1045 WRS0256 AWARNING Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating front air bag could seriously in jure or kill your child See Child re straints earlier in this
254. dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the ve hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated A CAUTION Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission XO VSOSPSS eae gt RY RSA SSX ES SSS LCE0083 Hooks if so equipped VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck vehicle Pulling a stuck vehicle AWARNING To avoid vehicle damage serious per sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure In case of emergency 6 13 e Attach recovery devices only to main structural members of the vehicle or the recovery hooks Do not use the vehicle tie downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer s instructions Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle Never pull at an angle Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifi cally for vehicle recovery Always follow the manufacturer s instructions for the recovery de vice Do not use the tie down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery
255. ds to input thumbs down for the current song Tilt up for more than 1 5 seconds to skip to the next song if the maximum of six skips per station per hour has not been exceeded ANTENNA The antenna cannot be shortened but can be removed When you need to remove the antenna turn the antenna rod counterclockwise To install the antenna rod turn the antenna clock wise Tighten the antenna rod to specification using a suitable tool such as an open end wrench The antenna rod tightening specification is 3 4 3 6 N m 30 32 in Ib Do not use pliers to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on the antenna surface The antenna rod cannot be hand tightened to the proper specification NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM MES if so equipped A CAUTION Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water e Use a damp soft cloth when cleaning the Mobile Entertainment System com ponents Do not use solvents or clean ing solutions LHA0389 Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or
256. e Downhill Speed Control DSC automati cally downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage However fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home A CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Automatic Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed
257. e S LRS0100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light displaying Af in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits for the air bag systems preten sioners and all related wiring When the ignition key is in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag or preten sioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible 1 62 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags
258. e the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove the cable from the iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod 5th Generation firmware version 1 2 3 or later iPod Classic firmware version 1 1 1 or later iPod Touch firmware version 2 0 0 or later iPod Nano 1st generation firmware ver sion 1 3 1 or later iPod Nano 2nd generation firmware ver sion 1 1 3 or later iPod Nano 3rd generation firmware ver sion 1 1 3 or later iPod Nano 4th generation firmware ver sion 1 0 4 or later 4 64 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems iPod Nano 5th generation firmware ver sion 1 0 1 or later Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above Groa roa XXXXXXXX Playlists fa x Z Q xxx Albums Genres E LHA1494 LHA1495 Audio main operation Interface Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Press the AUX button repeatedly to Switch to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the iPod AUX button When the AUX button is pressed with the syst
259. e VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are off The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC System The E indicator illuminates to indi cate the VDC system is off When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel The indicator flashes if this occurs All other VDC functions are off and the ff indicator will not flash The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction A WARNING The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steer ing operation at high speeds or by care less or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully Starting and driving 5 35 REAR SONAR SYSTEM if so equipped Do not modify the vehicle s suspension e When driving on an unstable surface If suspension parts such as shock ab Sorb
260. e an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel The vehicle weight capacity is indi cated on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operating conditions due to pre mature tire failure or unfavorable han dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading be yond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself e Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEU ET INFORMATION DE CHARGEMENT TOTAL x FRONT x REAR x TOTAL AVANT ARRIERE SEATING CAPACITY C NOMBRE DE PLACES THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XX kg OR XX Ibs LE POIDS COMBINE D OCCUPANTS ET DE CARGAISON NE DEVRAIT JAMAIS EXC DER XX an OU XX Ibs ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE TAILLE DU PNEU D ORIGINE FRONT AVANT PXXX XXRXX SPARE TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE A PRESSION DE GONFLAGE FROIU FOR ADDITIONAL
261. e control to the full HOT position When the HU position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the 4 C button will not come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the ve hicle is shut off This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The ZS mode automatically turns off al lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas senger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Bi level heating The bi level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets 1 Push the VS button to the OFF position The indicator light on the CS gt button will go off S will appear on the display if so equipped 2 Turn the air flow control dial to the z4 position 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind shield r S 1 Turn the air flow control dial to the position Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position When the position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the in
262. e for vehicles with a navigation system Refer to Control panel buttons in the Display screen heater air condi tioner audio and phone systems Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero Instruments and controls 2 5 WIC1246 LIC1135 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rpm Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce en gine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage 2 6 Instruments and controls ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range 1 when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions A CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action
263. e is equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake con troller To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness perform the following proce dure 1 Open the driver door Move the seat to the rearmost position Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness WIRE COLOR NOTE RED GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch to trailer brake controller BLACK Brake controller ground BROWN WHITE Trailer brake controller e sienes onpa RED BLUE Trailer brake controller eee mirae RED Fused trailer brake controller pe een o LTIO118 LTIO115 2 Apply the parking brake to access the 3 Locate the jumper harness connector under jumper harness connector the lower portion of the instrument panel The connector is taped to the wiring harness D as indicated The connector is marked with a white tag with elec brake conn Technical and consumer information 9 35 LTIO116 4 Peel off the tape and connect the jumper harness to the connector 2 5 Release the parking brake 6 Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer s instructions 9 36 Technical and consumer information Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive
264. e or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter Maintenance and do it yourself 8 43 MEMO 8 44 Maintenance and do it yourself 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option 9 3 Flexible fuel vehicle FFV fuel recommendation if so equipped sss 9 5 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations cece eee eee eee 9 7 SPSCHICATONS ive paretan E ppt del based 9 8 ENQIN issue x nentideedeas RA he xd eae E 9 8 Wheels and tires 2 000 eee eee ee eee 9 9 Dimensions and weights 00 c eee e ae 9 9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUNTY ice cu siasii dee e carting ele 9 10 Vehicle identification risse em mme 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Vehicle identification number chassis number is nete ILS NORMEN 9 10 Engine serial number illie eese 9 11 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 11 Emission control information label 9 11 Tire and loading information label 9 12 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Installing front license plate 0 eee 9 12 Vehicle loading
265. e phone call ENDING A CALL To end a phone call select the red phone 4 h icon on the screen or press the button on the steering wheel C18 Yat Voice Recognition Send Text XXXXXXXXXXXXXX Driving can t text On my way Running late Custom Messages LHA2300 TEXT MESSAGING A WARNING Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use the feature while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 115 The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface Sending a text message i Press the f button 2 Say Send Text The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipi ent of the text message Choose from the following aname Number Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls For more information about these options see Voice commands in this section Once a recipient is chosen the system prompts for which message to send Five predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages To choose one of the predefined messages sp
266. e rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer FOG LIGHTS if so equipped Replacing the fog light bulb A CAUTION e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust mois ture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0382 Disconnect the negative battery cable The fog light is accessible in front of the front tire and behind the bumper 3 Disconnect the bulb connector 1 4 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re move Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog light assembly Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it Do not touch the glass envelope Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE To adjust the fog light vertical aim Access the aiming screw from underneath the front bumper The aiming screw is located on the bottom of the fog light housing Turn the screw clockwise to raise the pattern Turn
267. e recognition systems Compact disc CD player operation If the radio is already operating it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play CD AUX button With a CD loaded press the CD AUX button until the CD mode is displayed on the screen CD MP3 display mode While listening to an MP3 WMA CD certain text may be displayed on the screen if the CD has been encoded with text information Depending on how the MP3 WMA CD is encoded informa tion such as Artist Song and Folder will be dis played The track number and the total number of tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as well 4 l SEEK CAT Reverse or Fast Forward button Press and hold the SEEK CAT button M4 or F9 for 1 5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The compact disc plays at an in creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc returns to normal play speed Ha Press the SEEK CAT button M4 while a CD or MP3 WMA CD is playing to return to the begin ning of the current track Press the SEEK CAT button M several times to skip backward sev eral tracks Press the SEEK CAT button 99 while a CD or MP3 WMA CD is playing to advance one track Press the SEEK CAT button 99 several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track on a CD is skipped the first tr
268. e tailgate 5 For vehicles without rear camera Close the tailgate securely Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 LPD2097 LPD0272 Connecting the rear camera if so equipped Before closing the tailgate reconnect the rear camera by performing the following 1 After attaching the rear tailgate to the truck keep the tailgate open and check that the tailgate harness is not hanging below the tailgate 2 Remove the connector bracket 2 from the sill by pressing the locking tab inward in the direction shown while pulling the bracket apart 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments Disconnect the chassis plug and bracket from the chassis wiring harness 3 Keep the connector and bracket in a safe place such as the glove box Disconnect the tailgate plug from the tail gate wiring harness Keep the tailgate plug in a safe place such as the glove box Connect the tailgate wiring harness to the chassis wiring harness Securely fix the rear camera connector bracket 1 to the rear sill Close the tailgate securely Locking the tailgate To unlock the tailgate turn the key toward the passenger side of the vehicle 1 To lock turn the key toward the driver side 2 Both the master key and the valet key can be used to lock and unlock the tailgate LTIO102 TIE DOWN HOOKS For your convenience tie down hooks are placed at each corner of t
269. e vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration This is be cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System After the registration process these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle A CAUTION Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect system function DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles The doors must be unlocked to open the doors A WARNING Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally o
270. eadlight fog light if so equipped turn signal switch P 2 30 Steering wheel switch for audio control Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System if so equipped P 4 71 P 4 83 P 4 98 P 4 109 Instrument brightness control P 2 33 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 47 P 2 34 Meters gauges and warning indicator lights P 2 4 2 13 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 5 21 Shift selector column if so equipped P 5 16 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 27 Navigation system if so equipped P 4 4 Climate controls P 4 17 P 4 25 P 4 32 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 47 Glove box P 2 45 Storage tray P 2 45 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Front passenger air bag status light Refer to the separate Navigation System Own P 1 56 er s Manual if so equipped Power outlet P 2 39 Heated seat switch if so equipped P 2 34 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off switch P 2 36 Tow mode switch P 2 38 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch if so equipped P 2 36 Shift selector console if so equipped P 5 16 Hazard warning flasher switch P 6 2 Power outlet P 2 39 4WD shift switch if so equipped P 5 27 Ignition switch P 5 9 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 14 Cargo lamp switch if so equipped P 2 34 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P
271. eak one of the following Driving can t text Call me e On my way e Running late e Okay To send one of the custom messages say Custom Messages If more than one cus tom message is stored the system will prompt for the number of the desired cus tom message For more information on set ting and managing custom text messages see Bluetooth settings in this section 4 116 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice Recognition C18 Yu E Send Text XXXXXXXXXX 9 03AM Msg 2 of 20 Send Text Read Text Previous Text LHA2301 Reading a received text message 1 Press the button 2 Say Read Text The text message sender and delivery time are shown on the screen Use the tuning switch to scroll through all text messages if more than one are available Press the button to exit the text message screen Press the V button to access the following options for replying to the text message Call Back Speak this command to call the sender of the text message using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Send Text Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message Read Text Speak this command to read the text mes sage again Previous Text Speak this command to move to the previ ous text message if available Next Text Speak this command to move to the next text message if available
272. ear Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 4 position Starting and driving 5 15 4H 62 MPH 100 km h 4LO 31 MPH 50 km h 3 Third gear Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous 2 Second gear Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak ing on downhill grades Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 2 position 2WD and AUTO 71 MPH 115 km h w o tow mode 62 MPH 100 km h w tow mode 4H 62 MPH 100 km h w o tow mode 62 MPH 100 km h w tow mode 5 16 Starting and driving 4LO 31 MPH 50 km h w o tow mode 27 MPH 44 km h w tow mode 1 Low gear Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 1 position 2WD and AUTO 43 MPH 70 km h w o tow mode 37 MPH 60 km h w tow mode 4H 43 MPH 70 km h w o tow mode 37 MPH 60 km h w tow mode 4LO 19 MPH 30 km h w o tow mode 16 MPH 27 km h w tow mode LSD2099 To move the shift selector
273. eat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 45 1 46 LRS0454 Front passenger position 3 The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed See Head restraints in this sec tion for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point type seat belt with retra
274. eces of the jack rod Find the oval shaped opening above the middle of the license plate Pass the T shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch located directly above the spare tire A CAUTION Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle Seat the T shaped end of the jack rod into the T shaped opening of the tire winch Ap ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Once the spare tire is completely lowered reach under the vehicle remove the retainer chain and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle A CAUTION Be sure to center the spare tire suspend ing plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire A WARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change e Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support
275. ecks and adjustments Automatic anti glare outside mirror Driver s side only if so equipped The outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition Switch is placed in the ON position The automatic anti glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle The indicator light on the auto matic anti glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating To turn off the anti glare feature press the button on the rearview mirror The indicator light will turn off To turn on the anti glare feature again press the button on the rearview mirror The in dicator light will turn on For information on the automatic anti glare rear view mirror see Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in this section Heated mirrors if so equipped Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility For addi tional information see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual TRUCK BOX LPD0270 TAILGATE Opening the tailgate Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the tailgate The support cables hold the tailgate open When closing the tailgate make sure the latches are securely locked Do not drive the vehicle
276. ecognition systems Resetting the time Hold the MENU button down and then press the TUNE SEEK button the time will reset as fol lows Ifthe displayed minutes before the reset are in the range of 00 29 the hour displayed before the reset will stay the same and the minutes will be reset to 00 Ifthe displayed minutes before the reset are in the range of 30 59 the hour displayed before the reset will advance by one hour and the minutes will be reset to 00 For example if the MENU button and the TUNE SEEK button are pressed while the time displayed is between 8 00 and 8 29 the display will be reset to 8 00 If the buttons were pressed while the time was between 8 30 and 8 59 the display will be reset to 9 00 At the same time the display will return to the audio FM AM radio operation FM AM button Press the FM AM button to change from AM FM reception The FM stereo indicator ST illuminates during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception 44 Manual tuning TUNE buttons Press the TUNE 44 or P gt button for less than 0 5 seconds for manual tuning To move quickly through the channels press and hold either TUNE 44 or PP for more than 1 5 seconds ra SEEK buttons SEEK tuning button down Press the SEEK 4 or 9l button to seek through the frequencies Seek tuning
277. ed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to come on Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle Do not fill a portable fuel container on a truck bed liner rubber truck bed mat or other insulating material Static elec tricity can cause an explosion of flam mable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Useonly approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid A CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on up to E 85 fuel Fuel system or other damage can occur if up to E 85 fuel is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 fuel For further information see the Fuel Rec ommendation in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap pear if the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened It may take a few driving trips forthe message to be displayed Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap pears may cause
278. ed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de termined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline e If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 1096 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 Technical and consumer information 9 3 E 15 fuel contains more than 1096 oxy genate E 15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and sys tems of the vehicle and should not be used Damage caused by s
279. edal all the way to the floor and hold it Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds After The shift selector cannot be moved out cranking the engine release the accel of P Park and into any of the other 1 Installation or extended use of electronic gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by placing the ignition Switch in the START position Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure f the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and hold it and then crank the engine Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts 5 12 Starting and driving erator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn ing the ignition key to START Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least
280. edly to switch to the iPod mode If the audio system is turned off while the iPod is playing the iPod plays when the audio system is turned back on If the audio system is off pressing the CD AUX or iPod MENU button turns the audio system on and plays the iPod If the audio system is on the audio system auto matically begins playing tracks from the iPod when it is plugged into the jack iPod MENU button Press the iPod MENU button while the iPod is connected to show the iPod operation menu on the audio display Scroll through the menu list using the TUNE SCROLL control dial Press EN TER to select a menu item Items in the iPod menu appear on the display in the following or der Now playing Playlists Artists e Albums Songs Podcasts Genres Composers Audiobooks Shuffle songs For more information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual ld l SEEK CAT buttons Press the SEEK CAT buttons M4 Skip backward or forward one track or PP to Press and hold the SEEK CAT buttons M4 or PM for 1 5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the track returns to normal play speed REPEAT RPT When the RPT button is pressed while a track is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Repeat Off
281. ee hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Flattite i axem ooR x 6 2 Floor mat positioning aid 7 5 Fluid Brake fluid dao Rege 8 12 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants lle 9 2 Engine coolant sess 8 7 Engine oil 1 uuu cR modom 8 9 Power steering fluid 8 12 Windshield washer fluid 8 13 F M V S S certification label 9 11 Foglight switch soc sera daa a as a 2 33 Front air bag system See supplemental restraint system 1 54 FrontseatS i kao een 1 2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants less 9 2 Fueleconomy so se sa tay lesen 5 23 Fuel fillerdoorandcap 3 12 Fuel gauge s dx eae ay a 2 7 Fuel octane rating 0 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Loose fuel cap warning 2 24 3 12 BUSES i i ete sie ae a oS 8 22 Fusible links s ac cae fee 3x3 8 23 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver o i i a lee 2 58 Gas cap cerd carare ni n 3 Ra 3 12 Gauge Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge cs de Sof bie ware aed 2 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 7 Fuelgauge i uo Rs 2 7 Odometer x socks ae ee E 3 2 5 Speedometer edora a 2 5 Tachometer less 2 6 Trip odometer 2 nacar eee 2 5 Voltmetar ce uuo situer teed ee ea 2 8 General maintenance 8 2 Glove box s ko ae Pak ek
282. een parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mi 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure the display if so equipped of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pres sure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises This does not indicate a system mal function 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle 6 8 In case of emergency A WARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop e The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed AWARNING If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle e Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres ent in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid t
283. efects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153
284. ehicle seat belts in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions WRSO0761 Rear facing step 2 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRS0669 Rear facing step 3 3 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 LRS0670 Rear facing step 4 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRS0762 Rear facing step 5 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0763 Rear facing step 6 After attaching the child restraint test it
285. ehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air 1 Press the button to the OFF position The indicator light on the VS gt button will go off 2 Press the air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion Press the A C button on The indicator light on the A C button will come on Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Operating tips Keep the windows closed while the air con ditioner is in operation After parking in the sun drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment Then close the windows This allows the air con ditioner to cool the interior more quickly The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps pre vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction e If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature over the normal range turn the air conditioner off See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating cooling or defrosting For additional information on heating and cooling
286. els without the NISSAN vehicle im mobilizer system turn the key to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel 8 Now the vehicle may be moved to the de sired location If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park have a NISSAN dealer check the auto matic transmission system as soon as possible A WARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Starting and driving 5 19 Accelerator downshift in D position For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed Fail safe When the fail safe operation occurs please note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check
287. elt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs not the abdomen A booster seat can only be used in seating posi tions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be posi tioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs use the seat belt without the booster seat A WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 25 CHILD RESTRAINTS ARS 1098 WRS0256 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in structions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap Even the stron gest adult cannot
288. em off and the iPod connected the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected press the AUX button re peatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle s audio system display screen is similar to the iPod interface Use the touchscreen BACK button or the scrolling knob to navigate the menus on the screen When the iPod is playing touch the Menu key to bring up the iPod interface Depending on the iPod model the following items may be available on the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual Playlists Artists Albums Genres Songs Composers Audiobooks Podcasts Random and repeat play mode While the iPod is playing the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly Random Touch the Random key to apply a random play pattern to the iPod9 When the random mode is active the 24 icon is displayed to the left of the song title or album name to denote which random pattern is applied To cancel Random mode touch the Random key until no icon is displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 Repeat Touch the Repeat key to apply a repeat play pattern to the iPod When the repeat mode is active the amp 7 icon is displayed to the left of the song title or album name to denote which re
289. en may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the RearView Moni tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object When the contrast of objects is low at night pressing the SETTING button or MENU but ton may not change the brightness Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night If dirt rain or snow attaches to the camera the RearView Monitor may not display ob jects Clean the camera Do not use body wax on the camera window If body wax does get on the camera window wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp ened with mild detergent diluted with water 4 16 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems VENTS E Be t t J WHA1128 Adjust air flow direction for the driver s and pas senger s side vents CD center vents 2 and rear passengers if so equipped vents 3 by moving the vent slide and or vent assemblies HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER manual Type A if so equipped A WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of
290. en sitting in the rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bag inflation Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 53 LRS2093 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag 2 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags inflators 3 Air bag Control Unit ACU 4 Supplemental front impact air bag modules 5 Crash zone sensor 6 Occupant classification system control unit 7 Occupant classification sensor pressure sensor 8 Seat belt buckle switches 9 Seat belt with pretensioner 10 Satellite sensors 11 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and right front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver
291. en the memory has stored the position the indicator light will stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds Ifthe battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the memory storage function You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Once the memory storage function has been restarted you can store a memory position See Memory storage function in this sec tion Selecting the memorized position Set the shift selector to the P Park position then Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 or Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 The driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s seat will automatically move when the shift selector is placed in the P Park position This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The driver s se
292. enger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in 2 18 Instruments and controls the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage A4 Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the seat belts with pretensioner system may not function properly For additional details see Supplemen tal restraint system in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the f
293. engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed traction control function If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO the S indicator light will come on and the VDC system will be turned off See Us ing four wheel drive 4WD earlier in this section Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following condi tions understeer vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steer ing input oversteer vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle but it can not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations When the VDC system operates the fl indi cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the following The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light in the Instru ments and controls section If a malfunction occurs in the system the f indicator light will come on in the instrument panel Th
294. ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed
295. ent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature over the normal range turn the air conditioner off See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating cooling or defrosting For additional information on heating and cooling see Heater and air con ditioner in this section The air recirculation gt button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting DEFROSTING DEFOGGING heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button Air A C Air flow Temp Fan Button control control control recirculation M Air passed through WHA1079 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 BI LEVEL HEATING E Air passed through heater core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button A C Air flow Temp Fan Air Button control control control recrea lation 3 HOT HI OFF
296. ent odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 or via e mail at nnaconsumeraffairs nissan usa com For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e mail at information centre nissancanada com If you prefer visit us at www nissanusa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Exterior ftOrit ieu eisk peche ATIS eaiticupES 0 3 Exterior reak irr nds eR EERIDwOPRERYS DES 0 4 Passenger compartment 0c eee eee eee 0 5 Instrument panel 2er m Rn ivars Engine compartment check locations Warning indicator lights AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1 2ndrow
297. ent test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Technical and consumer information 9 39 AA WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 9 40 Technical and consumer information A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission D
298. ent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A WARNING e The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling VDC system ground clear ance body to tire clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to acci dents and could result in serious per sonal injury If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury 8 42
299. ently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off road use However avoid driving in deep wa ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use unlike a conventional off road ve hicle Remember that two wheel drive models are less capable than four wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud or the like Starting and driving 5 7 Please observe the following precautions A WARNING Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain Do not drive across steep slopes In stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes Off road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward Many hills are too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you may stall If you drive down them you may not be able to control your speed If you drive across them you may roll over Do not shift gears while driving on downh
300. epeat Touch the Repeat key to apply a repeat play pattern to the USB device When the repeat mode is active the Q icon is displayed to the left of the song title or album name to denote which repeat pattern is applied To cancel Repeat mode touch the Repeat key until no Q icon is displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 LHA2455 iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod9 can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove the cable from the iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod 5th Generation firmware version 1 3 or later iPod Classic 80GB firmware version 1 1 2PC or later iPod Clas
301. er use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel e Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction To help ensure safe driving some functions can not be operated while driving The on screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper ate the navigation system A WARNING e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 f SETTINGS Phone amp LHA2245 Bass Treble Balance Fade Speed Sensitive Vol LHA2246 DISPLAY SETUP Very Bright o mowes v Brightness Display Mode Scroll Direction LHA1478 Touch screen operation Selecting the item Touch an item to select For example to select the Audio key touch the Audio key 1 on the Screen Adjusting the item For screens where an item can be adjusted incre mentally such as when adjusting the bass and treble for the audio system touch the key 1 or the key 2 to adjust
302. erior map lights Use a cloth to protect the housing LDI0364 Personal lights If so equipped Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing LDI0385 Vanity mirror If so equipped Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 LDI0341 Step light If so equipped Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0388 Puddle light If so equipped Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing License plate light WDI0411 LDI0410 Rear combination light WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all 4 tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the ve hicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pres sure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a
303. ers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling per formance and the indicator may flash or the f indicator light may illuminate If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly and the f indica tor light may illuminate If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the f indicator light may illuminate When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate prop erly and the fl indicator may flash or the ff indicator light may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads 5 36 Starting and driving such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the indicator may flash or the ff indicator light may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the VDC system may not operate properly and the ft indicator may flash or the fl indicator light may illuminate The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road WSD0103 A WARNING e Always turn and look back before b
304. es sure for all four tires You can also check the pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen The order of the tire pressure figures dis played on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position See Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section The Tire and Loading Information label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the In case of emergency section A WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as pos
305. es assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select Only one phone can be active at a time Delete Phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone Turn Bluetooth OFF D Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone VOICE ADAPTATION VA MODE Voice Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The system is capable of storing a different voice adaptation model for each connected phone Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park 4 94 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The system Press and hold the amp F button for more than 5 seconds announces Press the PHONE SEND button for the hands free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE END 4 5 button to select a differen
306. es in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Children should be properly re strained in the rear seat and if appro priate in a child restraint 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING The seat belt should be properly ad justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly SSS0014 AA WARNING Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the sys
307. eseu sese wie die eene Ih enii 2 47 Grocery hooks if so equipped sssue 2 50 Lockable bedside storage compartment if so equipped 0 cece cece eee eee ees 2 50 NWI OW Spe 3 ten netu tle trek rapta Ged od atone 2 51 Power windows if so equipped 2 51 Manual windows if so equipped 2 53 Rear sliding window if so equipped 2 53 Rear power window switch if so equipped 2 54 Moonroof if so equipped 6 cece eee eee eee ee 2 54 Automatic moonroof cece eee eee eee 2 54 Interior lighit i a ae ne 2 56 Console light if so equipped sisse 2 57 Personal lights if so equipped sssssss 2 57 Map lights if so equipped 6 cece eee eee 2 58 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped 2 58 Programming HomeLink9 sssessss 2 59 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers 00008 2 60 Operating the HomeLink universal ucro UM 2 60 Programming trouble diagnosis 005 2 61 Clearing the programmed information 2 61 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 61 If your vehicle is stolen siess conics esses esee 2 61 INSTRUMENT PANEL j 234 5 8 T 8 5 1 10 11 1 26 24 27 25 23 22 20 18 21 19 17 15 14 LIC2437 2 2 Instruments and controls 10 11 12 13 14 Vents P 4 17 H
308. essing Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by the tire dressing manufacturer Appearance and care 7 3 CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturers recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AA WARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury 7 4 Appearance and care A CAUTION e Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material e Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do
309. essing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control A WARNING While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the effect of the parking brake is weakened or when ever
310. etain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film A CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the window
311. ete Phone or Device Replace phone NEM Select phone or Device LHA2274 Bluetooth Presets LHA2292 Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle follow the procedure below 1 Press the SETTING button 2 Select the Bluetooth key 3 Select the Add Telephone or Device key This same screen can be accessed to re move replace or select a different Bluetooth device 4 The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recom mended cellular phones Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode press the CD AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the Screen The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis played on the screen Use the Preset 3 button for play and the Preset 4 button for pause Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files the device can be connected to the vehicle s audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehi
312. ff or skips 4 40 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Universal Serial Bus USB memory if so equipped This system supports various USB memory sticks USB hard drives and iPod players There are some USB devices which may not be sup ported with this system Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connector Do not force the memory stick or USB cable into the USB connector During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the humidity If this occurs remove the USB memory stick and dehumidify or ventilate the player com pletely The player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high Decrease the temperature before use Do not leave the USB memory in a place prone to static electricity or where the air conditioner blows directly The data in the USB memory may be damaged Prepare the USB device by yourself be cause it is not equipped with the vehicle The USB device cannot be formatted with this system If you want to format the USB memory use your personal computer Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly Some characters used in other languages Chinese Japanese etc are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen NISSAN recommends using English lan guage characters with USB devices Do not connect the USB device if the con nector or cable is wet Allow the cable
313. flates Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems This is to prevent dam age to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems e Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag e Work around and on the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or discon nected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur tain and rollover air bag systems The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain and rollover
314. for any reason while the vehicle is in N Neutral or any D Drive position the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch Move the shift selector to the P Park position then the key can be turned to LOCK P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position R Reverse A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving 4 Fourth g
315. fore loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOA
316. g a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated 1 4 SOURCE LHA2054 1 Source select and power on switch 2 Menu control switch ENTER button 3 Volume control switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL if so equipped POWER on switch With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi tion push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio System on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 SOURCE select switch Push the source select switch to change the mode in the following sequence AM FM1 FM2 XM1 satellite radio if so equipped XM2 satellite radio if so equipped XM8 satellite radio if so equipped CD gt USB iPod if so equipped Bluetooth Au dio AUX AM These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume v A Tuning While the display is showing a map or audio screen tilt the Menu Control switch upward or downward to select a station track CD or folder For most audio sources tiling the sw
317. g engine oll Ls 8 10 Changing engine oil filter 8 11 Checking engine oillevel 8 9 Engine lll uou eR RU 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 6 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Engine oil viscosity 0 9 7 Outside mirrors uus eu ee are d 3 18 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 10 Owner s manual order form 9 43 Owner s manual service manual order information 5 s ook RR m RR ERES 9 43 P Parking Parking brake operation 5 20 Parking parking on hills 5 31 Pedal position adjustment 3 14 Personallights llle 2 57 Phone Bluetooth hands free System d a s poa rk e 4 83 4 98 4 109 Power Front seat adjustment ss 1 4 Powerdoorlocks i senor o saaa ahia 3 4 Power outlet ls 2 39 2 40 Power rear windows 2 52 Power steering fluid 8 12 Power steering system 5 32 Power windows sess 2 51 Rear power windows 2 52 Power inverter switch ss 2 37 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 On pavement and off road driving precautions s sce sunt OUR ad 5 3 Precautions on child restraints 1 26 1 32 1 36 1 43 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 15 Precautions on supplemental restraint Syslemi als nea ea EORR
318. g system is filled at the factory with a pre diluted mixture of 5096 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue and 50 water to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The antifreeze solution con tains rust and corrosion inhibitors Additional en gine cooling system additives are not necessary AA WARNING Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap A CAUTION Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine transmission and or cooling system When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is pre diluted to provide antifreeze protection to 34 F 37 C If additional freeze protec tion is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue concentrate following the direc tions on the container If an equivalent coolant other than Ge
319. g the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag infor mation is displayed on the Artist song title line on the display Windows and Windows Media are regis tered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Micro soft Corporation of the USA Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 FJ FOLDER lo MP3 or WMA WHA1078 Playback order chart Playback order Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display If there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order 4 38 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Specificat
320. g wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the 4 button on the steering wheel To use the system faster you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu For example press the X button and after the tone say Call Redial How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples Either zero or oh can be used for O Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Numbers can be spoken in small groups The system will prompt you to continue en tering digits if desired Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six six two The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six two zero zero uxi Say pound for Say star for avail able when using the Special Number c
321. ght GVW maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 26 Technical and consumer information Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue king pin load use the following proce dure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer
322. gine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The headlights automatically illuminate at a re duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the 2 gt 4 position Turn the headlight switch to the 2 position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others AK CN J PUSH TRIP WIC1506 WIC1253 WIC1254 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in thezDIz 22 or AUTO position with auto lights activated Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru ment panel lights when driving at night TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal D Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automati
323. grammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information Instruments and controls 2 61 FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference in cluding interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device 2 62 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments KOYE ee sr
324. h to the OFF P4 or D position LIC0836 Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor 1 located on the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sensor controls the autolight if it is cov ered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged Instruments and controls 2 31 WIC1252 Headlight beam select To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on andthe O light illuminates Pull the lever back to select the low beam 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the gt d position the headlights will turn off after a period of time 2 32 Instruments and controls or 2 After the headlights automatically turn off with the headlight switch in the2P gt 4 or 2 position the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then turned to the PG or 2 position ACAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the en
325. h your vehicle is equipped READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil iarity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle A WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers NEVER drive under the influence of al cohol or drugs ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you e ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Pre teen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information For descriptions specified for four wheel drive models E322 mark is placed at the begin ning of the applicable sections items As with other vehicles with features for off road use failure to operate four wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read Driving safety precautions in the Start ing and driving section of this manual ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIV ING
326. he road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the ap propriate driving lane f you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting acurb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic A WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire
327. he fuse box cover to remove 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller WDIO0452 Type A 5 If the fuse is open amp replace it with an equivalent good fuse B 6 Push the fuse box cover to install 7 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Type B LDI0456 LDI2035 Extended storage switch If any electrical equipment does not operate remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse NOTE The extended storage switch is used for long term vehicle storage Even if the ex tended storage switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it Replace only the open fuse in the switch with a new fuse How to replace the extended storage switch 1 To remove the extended storage switch be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position 2 Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position 3 Remove the fuse box cover 4 Pinch the locking tabs found on each side of the storage switch 5 Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box 2 Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 BATTERY REPLACEMENT A CAUTION Be careful notto allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI2026 KEYFOB if so equipped 3 Install a new battery with the
328. he other mirrors or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects Use the outside mirror remote control to adjust the top portion of the trailer tow mirror The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror can be moved manually in any direction for a better rear view LPD0268 Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to the desired position for better visibility while tow ing a trailer A WARNING Do not extend or retract mirrors while driv ing You may lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident A CAUTION Driving in tight spaces with mirrors ex tended may cause damage to the vehicle Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 n Li iu i iu i OPEN T i Tarada CL SE E LPD0259 LPD0269 LPD0196 o peA Type B Power folding outside mirrors if so Manual folding outside mirrors if so equipped equipped Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it CAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors Push the switch to open or close the mirrors If one of the mirrors are manually operated or bumped the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point To correct electronic mirror operation cycle the mirrors by pushing the CLOSE switch until completely closed then push the OPEN switch until the mirrors are in the open position 3 20 Pre driving ch
329. he passenger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the beginning of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Front air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the driver and right front passenger They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate
330. he specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 POWER STEERING FLUID V Hor MAX MAX HoT coo cou MIN MIN 6 WDI0256 The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is at or below the MIN line add Genu ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature Remove the cap and fill through the opening 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself A CAUTION e DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent Genuine BRAKE FLUID For further brake fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi cle s stopping ability Clean the filler cap before removing Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any
331. he steering wheel turn the ignition to the LOCK position Remove the key To unlock the steering wheel insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer ing wheel slightly right and left If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi tion turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position 0 OFF 1 The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel ACC Accessories 2 This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ON Normal operating position 3 This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories START 4 This position starts the engine As soon as the engine has started release the key It automati cally returns to the ON position NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM if so equipped The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 sec ond
332. he top center of the instrument panel helps the system main tain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around this sensor SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system A WARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment 4 34 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi tion press the PWR power VOL volume knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ e
333. he track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast for warding When the button is released the audio file returns to normal play speed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 x Press the SEEK CAT button M while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the SEEK CAT button M several times to skip backward several tracks l SEEK CAT buttons Press the SEEK CAT button 99 while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the SEEK CAT button Pl several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played RDM button When the RDM button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows All Random 1 Folder Random OFF All Random all tracks on the USB device will be played randomly 1 Folder Random all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly OFF No random play pattern is applied The indicator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat OFF 1
334. he truck box These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box The weight of the cargo load must be evenly distributed over both the front and the rear axles All cargo should be securely fastened with ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle A WARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER if so equipped The automatic drive positioner system has two features Memory storage function Entry exit function Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 LPD0260 MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory Follow these procedures to use the memory sys tem 1 Place the shift selector in the P Park posi tion 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Adjust the driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch For additional infor 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments mation see Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint sys tem section of this manual and Pedal posi tion adjustment and Outside mirrors ear lier in this section
335. he vehicle information display INFO but ton 1 located on the instrument panel to toggle through the following modes MPG Range Warning Rotate the INFO button 2 to highlight the de sired menu option within the selected mode Press the INFO button 1 to enter the high lighted menu The icons at the bottom of the display screen show the options available ENTER Press the INFO button to select a highlighted option d NEXT Rotate the INFO button to high light an option Instruments and controls 2 21 gt SKIP gt DETAIL ENTER NEXT WIC1166 Warning mode if so equipped The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel For more information about potential warnings see Vehicle information dis play warnings and indicators later in this section 2 22 Instruments and controls WARNING A WARNING Un RANGE ogo BN WARNING 0 0 c LOW WASHER WARNING RELEASE PARKING BRAKE CRUISE 5 CRUISE SET 6 4LO 7 WARNIN ING 0 0 LOOSE FUEL S CAP WARNING CHECK TIRE PRESSURE LIC2006 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators 1 Door open warning 2 Low fuel warning 3 Low windshield washer fluid
336. helping to restrain front seat occu pants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest The supplemental air bag warning light A is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system See SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT in this section for more de tails If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual WRS0885 1 SRS Air bag warning labels The warning labels are located on the sur face of the sun visor SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 61
337. ht will come on 5 28 Starting and driving f the 4WD warning light comes on the 4WD indicator light goes out A CAUTION If the 4WD shift indicator light indica tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the 4H position at low ambient temperatures the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunctioning drive system If the indi cator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on have the system checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer 4WD warning light Comes on or blinks when Warning light There is a mal function in the 4 wheel drive system The difference in wheel rotation is large The 4WD warning light is located in the meter The 4WD warning light comes on when the key switch is turned to ON It turns off soon after the engine is started If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the key switch is ON the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink If the 4WD warning light comes on the 4WD shift indicator light goes out A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly about once per two seconds Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast A CAUTION e If the warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible e Shifting between 4H an
338. icator if so equipped This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the indicator blinks while the engine is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not function ing properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Transfer 4LO position indicator E3zq model This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch placed in the ON position If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position and the indicator blinks stop the vehicle drive slowly forward and the indicator will turn on When you shift between 4H and 4LO stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N Neutral position then depress and turn the 4WD shift Switch to 4LO or 4H The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the switch while driving You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4LO unless you have first stopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector to N Neutral Make sure the transfer 4LO posi tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other AWD shift indicator E xz model While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch The 4WD shift indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other Automatic transmission
339. id leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected immediately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radia tor and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbogy oth erwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care sec tion of this manual Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precau tions which should be closely observed A WARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface a
340. id sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic Turn on the hazard warning flashers Parkon a
341. ies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This de vice may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your vehicle be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts A WARNING Acellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full atten tion may be given to vehicle operation Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recommended Ex ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by
342. ill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill At the top there could be a drop off or other hazard that could cause an accident 5 8 Starting and driving If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill never at tempt to turn around Your vehicle could tip or roll over Always back straight down in R Reverse gear and apply brakes to control your speed Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade resulting in loss of control and an acci dent Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain Prop erly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual This could cause your vehicle to roll over Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off road The steering wheel could move sud denly and injure your hands Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim Before operating the vehicle ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds With a higher center of gravity your NISSAN is more af fected by stro
343. imate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 Operating procedure of the Bluetooth au dio will vary depending on the devices Make BLUETOOTH is a sure how to operate your audio device be trademark owned by fore using it with this system o Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc TheBluetooth audio may be stopped under and licensed to the following conditions Visteon and Bosch Receiving a call on the Hands Free Phone System Checking the connection to the hands free phone Do not place the Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless con nection disruption While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual This system supports the Bluetooth Audio Distribution Profile A2DP AVRCP 4 42 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ca D mG 1 ABC wens e FM AM n lt lt b gt J TUNE VOL RPT 4 LA s T PWR 10 9 8 WHA1075 1 PRESET A B C button 7 TUNE buttons 2 CD eject button 8 RPT button 3 MENU button 9 PWR button VOL control knob 4 CD insert slot 10 RDM button 5 CD button 11 Station selec
344. in vehicle damage or shortened engine life Printing September 2013 19 Publication No OM14E OA6OUO Printed in U S A A6O D
345. ing rear differential E Lock system on indicator light if so equipped Front passenger air bag status light The following lights come on briefly and then go off ABS o amp 8 0 8 If any light fails to come on it may indicate a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system repaired promptly High beam indicator light Blue Malfunction indicator light MIL Security indicator light if so equipped Slip indicator light Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section Instruments and controls 2 13 ABS amp Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion Automatic Transmission check CHECK ps warning light When the ign
346. installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufac turer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully load ing your vehicle when using tire chains In addi tion drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads WDIO0258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of eme
347. ion 5 Refer to the appropriate child restraint in stallation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap consult your NISSAN dealer for details BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats AWARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child s arm A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat o
348. ion e Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly Check your local regulations A WARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 6 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft Ib 29 39 N m 7 Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary WDIO505 CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1 Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking b
349. ion chart Supported fe systems MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 MP3 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR versions 1 WMA WMA7 WMA8 WMA9 Sampling frequency 32 kHz 48 kHz 48 kops 102 Kops VBR Tag information ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 MP3 only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Max folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 128 characters 01 ASCIl 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian Displayable character codes 2 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and MP3 WMA files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Files wi
350. ion control information label is at tached to the underside of the hood as shown Technical and consumer information 9 11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE prt 6 as CI LORS o WTIO0100 WTIO0220 Y LTIOO93 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is affixed to Loading Information label The label is located as the underside of the hood as shown shown 9 12 Technical and consumer information Use the following steps to mount the front license plate 1 Make holes on the plastic finisher at the location mark small dimple using a 0 20 in 5 mm drill Apply light pressure to the drill Install the license plate holder using the two screws provided with the holder Mount the license plate using two M6 14mm bolts License plate bolt tightening torque 3 8 4 7 ft Ib 5 10 6 37 N m VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION A WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms be
351. is in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Appearance and care 7 5 Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible 7 6 Appearance and care A CAUTI
352. isplay reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles WIC0355 Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Press and hold the button for about 11 seconds or the button for about 8 seconds The current zone number will ap pear in the display Release the button 2 Find your current location on the zone map Refer to the illustration 3 Pressthe orthe button repeat edly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the dis play Once you have selected a zone num ber the display will show a compass direc tion within a few seconds NOTE Use zone number 5 for Hawaii Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct direction is not shown follow this procedure Instruments and controls 2 11 1 With the display turned on press and hold the button for about 13 seconds or the 4 for about 10 seconds The C ic
353. itch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See Automatic drive positioner in Pre driving checks and adjustments for automatic drive po sitioner operation 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park LRS0634 LRS0635 Seat lifter if so equipped for driver s seat Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion Lumbar support driver s seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 WRS0368 Type A Stowed pos
354. itch up down for more than 1 5 seconds provides a different function than a tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds AM and FM Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station XM if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to go to the next or previous category iPod if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number CD Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number if playing compressed audio files USB if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number 4 72 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Bluetooth Audio if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the next song Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the current song Pandora Audio if so equipped Tilt up for less than 1 5 seconds to input thumbs up for the current song Tilt down for less than 1 5 secon
355. ition Resting position ARMRESTS if so equipped To use the armrests on the captain s chairs type A if so equipped pull them down to the resting position To use the center armrest on the bench seat type B if so equipped pull on the tab in the center of the seat and fold it down to the resting position Type B 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0425 HEAD RESTRAINTS 1st row only A WARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 4 2 3 LRS2020 LRS0887 WRS0134 The illustration shows the seating positions Components Adjustment equipped with head restraints The first row head restraints are adjustable A Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint
356. ition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on for about 2 seconds If the light comes on at any other time it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 2 14 Instruments and controls ATP Automatic transmission park waring light xz model AA WARNING e If the ATP light is ON this indicates that the automatic transmission P Park po sition will not function and the transfer case is in neutral e When parking always make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov ing unexpectedly resulting in serious personal injury or property damage e Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD 4H or4LO position again to turn off the ATP warning light when the shift selector to the P position and the ATP warning light is ON Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position move the shift selector to the N position once shift the shift selector into P again and make sure the ATP warning light is OFF This light indicates that the automatic transmis sion parking function is not engaged If the trans fer control is not secured in any drive position while the shift selector is in the P Park position the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock Brake warning light This ligh
357. ity to the tow vehicle A weight distributing hitch system Class IV is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight distributing hitch system NOTE A weight distributing hitch system may af fect the operation of trailer surge brakes If you are considering use of a weight distributing hitch system with a surge brake equipped trailer check with the surge brake hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done Follow the instructions provided by the manufac turer for installing and using the weight distributing hitch system General set up instructions are as follows 1 Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and the doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within O 5 inches 0 13 mm of the reference height measured in step 2 The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2 A WARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached
358. ks and adjustments section or Vehicle electronic systems vehicles with navigation system in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone sys tems section 4 Confirm that the gt indicator light comes on The light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security system is now pre armed After about 30 seconds the ve hicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase The ee light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob or the ignition switch is placed to ACC or ON the system will not arm 2 26 Instruments and controls Ifthe key is turned slowly when locking the door the system may not arm Fur thermore if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key the system may be disarmed when the key is re moved If the indicator light fails to glow for a period of time unlock the door once and lock it again Evenwhen the driver and or passengers are in the vehicle the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with the ignition switch in the OFF position The lockable bedside storage com partment if so equipped is not pro tected by the vehicle security system Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently
359. lacement 8 26 Keyless entry system See remote keyless entry system 3 7 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 12 C M V S S certification label 9 11 Emission control information label 9 11 Engine serial number 9 11 F M V S S certification label 9 11 Tire and Loading Information label 9 12 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Warning labels for SRS 1 61 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Systemes fine ee a a a oe Ba a 1 28 License plate Installing the license plate 9 12 Light Air bag warning light 1 62 2 18 Brake light See stop light 8 29 Bulb check instrument panel 2 13 Bulb replacement 8 29 Charge warning light 2 15 Fog light switch 00 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 30 Headlight control switch 2 30 Headlights leen 8 27 Interiorlight eosa e o 2 56 Light bulbs 2 gen ee ee ee ae aed 8 27 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low windshield washer fluid warning light a suus mom ee aoe noms 2 24 Passenger air bag and status light 1 56 Personallights 00 2 57 Security indicator light 2 20 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders ow a SY ae ee 2 13 Lights Map lights s zz RR xk 2 58 Lock Child safety rear doorlock 3 7
360. lant stop the en gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop This light is not designed to indicate a low oil or low coolant level Check the oil level with the dipstick and check the coolant level on the reservoir See Engine oil and Checking engine coolant level in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Also see If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION e Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately Such damage is not cov ered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so e If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos sible If the engine is overheated con tinued operation of the vehicle may se riously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate ac tion required Instruments and controls 2 15 awp 4WD warning light xz model The 4WD warning light comes on when the key Switch is turned to ON It turns off soon after the engine is started If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink See 4WD warning light in the Starting and driving section A CAUTION e If the warning light comes on or blinks during o
361. lay and the center display screen Select None to have text message notifications not displayed SMS Auto Reply Function Select to toggle the SMS auto reply func tionality on or off SMS Auto Reply Message Select to choose a message that is sent when the auto reply function is activated Add Vehicle s Signature Select to toggle on or off the addition of the vehicle signature to outgoing messages Predefined SMS Messages Select the predefined SMS messages that are used by the system NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM if so equipped The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle such as the phone and navigation Systems To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press the button located on the steering wheel When prompted speak the command for the system you wish to activate The command given is picked up by the microphone and performed when it is properly recognized NISSAN Voice Recognition will provide a voice response as well as a message in the center display to inform you of the command results USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the sys tem is ready to accept voice commands If the bf button is pressed before the initializa tion completes the system will announce Voice Recognition System not ready Please wait Monitor
362. led if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight This can occur even if the vehicle is parked Un buckle the seat belt to release the child If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool such as a knife or scissors to release the seat belt Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Forward facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint A WARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly
363. lems However they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to per form satisfactorily under off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns at high speeds As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated
364. level surface and apply the parking brake Move the shift selector to P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle A WARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P Park Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance In case of emergency 6 3 eo WCE0044 Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 1 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up A WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury 6 4 In case of emergency Getting the spare tire and tools 1 Fold up the rear bench seat Refer to Fold ing the rear bench seat in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual LCE0093 2 Unscrew and remove the jack and tool kit w em Hg WCE0150 WCE0151 3 Assemble the two pi
365. ll edge 3 Two digit number 65 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 5 15 t WDI0395 R The R stands for radial Two digit number 15 This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches Two or three digit number 95 This number is the tire s load index It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 XX XX t t 2 3 t 4 Example 2 TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 DOT XX XX XXX XXXX XXX XXX XXXX t t 5 6 WDI0396 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire S Tire ply composition and material
366. llustration shows the seating positions Components Removal equipped with head restraints The second row head restraints are removable but not adjustable 1 Head restraint Use the following procedure to remove the head z x E r j 2 Lock knob restraints A Indicates the seating position is equipped with PROCE KMO a head restraint 3 Stalks 1 Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or adjustable headrest 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 Push and hold the lock knob s 3 Pull the head restraint up until it is removed from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad just the seat or seatback before an occupant uses the seating position i LRS2075 Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction Push the head restraint down until it locks in place FLEXIBLE SEATING A WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position In a collision people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure e
367. lly open and have the vehicle inspected immediately e Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the rear vent windows liftgates doors and trunk lids if so equipped closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen ger compartment If you must drive with one of these open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body follow the manufacturers recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle e The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING e The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot
368. locks The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition Switch in any position except the ON posi tion The interior lights and puddle lights if so equipped turn on and the light timer acti vates for a period of time when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position with the ignition switch in any position except the ON position Press the i within 5 seconds button on the keyfob again All doors unlock The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed The interior lights can be turned off without wait ing by inserting the key into the ignition switch and placing it in the ON or START position locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position Auto relock Whenthe if buttononthe keyfob is pressed all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is per formed Any door is opened Akeyis inserted into the ignition switch and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON Linking the keyfob to automatic drive positioner memory If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting See Automatic drive positioner in this section Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 Using the interior lights Press the button on the keyfob once to turn on the interior lights and puddle ligh
369. lover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions In a side impact the curtain and roll over air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted In a rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis tance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finishers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position After turning the ignition key to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 us TA Sit upright and well back WRS0031 AA WARNING e The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help
370. lowing two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Visteon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 85 Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds Ifthe button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will announce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be recei
371. lt to release the child If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already un buckled release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool such as a knife or scissors to release the seat belt 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0419 Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section WRS0137 WRS0138 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage The retractor is designed to lock dur ing a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the re tractor Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and p
372. luetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to List of voice commands in this section 4 4 88 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the amp button for more than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND f button for the hands free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE END 4 5 button to select a different lan guage 3 Press the button For information on voice adaptation see Voice Adaptation VA mode in this sec tion 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage to Spanish in Spanish or French in French To select the current language press the PHONE SEND button To select a different language tilt the tuning switch or v upordown NOTE You must press the l button within 5 seconds to change the language 5 Ifyou decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Connecting procedure NOTE The connecting procedure must be per formed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the pro
373. m key to select and or adjust various functions of the system A screen with additional options will appear DISPLAY SETUP Brightness i Very Bright Display Mode i Automatic 0 mons v sero Direction LHA1482 Display Select the Display key to adjust the appearance of the display The following settings can be adjusted Brightness The brightness of the display can be set to Very Bright Bright Default Dark or Very Dark Touch the Brightness key to cycle through the options Display Mode The display can be adjusted to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle Touch the Display Mode key to cycle through the options Day and Night modes are suited for the respective times of day while Automatic controls the display automatically Scroll Direction The direction that menus scroll can be adjusted Choose either up or down amp CLOCK SETUP Time Format Date Format Clock Mode Set Clock Manually Daylight SavingsTime LHA2250 Clock Settings Select the Clock Settings key to adjust the time and the appearance of the clock on the display The following settings can be adjusted Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours Date Format Select from five possible formats of displaying the day month and year Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9
374. mber one until the problem is resolved Symptom error message Solution The system responds Command Not 1 Ensure that the command format is valid Use the List Commands or What Can Say command under the Help menu Recognized or the system fails to rec 2 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level ognize the command correctly 3 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example with the windows open or the defroster on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized 4 If optional words of the command have been omitted then the command should be tried with these in place Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 125 MEMO 4 126 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide suus 5 2 Three way catalyst escucs sicari eren 5 2 On pavement and off road driving precautlors us ur tud iet peek ce 5 3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover 00008 5 6 Off road recoVely iiio tcp rt eR nite de bebe 5 6 Rapid air pressure loss 00 eese 5 6 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 7 Driving safety precautions 0 000 5 7 Ignition switch
375. n The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass screen breaks do not touch it Doing so could result in an injury The screen rotates down to view and up into the housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched securely into the housing when stored LHA0315 FLIP DOWN SCREEN The flip down screen has a wireless remote con trol receiver 1 located at the bottom of the Screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 75 SAA0720 SAA0721 Headphones Power ON OFF Press the power button to turn the headphones on or off Volume control Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol ume The headphones will automatically be turned off in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that period To prevent the battery from being dis charged keep the power supply turned off when not in use NOTE For optimum infrared headphone perfor mance increase the volume on the rear seat controller to the maximum level and adjust the infrared headphone volume us ing the volume control on the headphones Using a lower volume setting on the rear seat controller can cause static noise in the infrared headphones 4 76 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC DVD A CAUTION Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is
376. n FM AM button Press the FM AM button to change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM If another audio source is playing when the FM AM button is pressed the audio source play ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing The FM stereo indicator STEREO is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio auto matically changes from stereo to monaural re ception XM band select Press the XM button to change the band as follows XM1 XM2 XM3 XM1 satellite if so equipped Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 When the XM button is pressed while the ignition Switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the XM button is pressed the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not avail able in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the XM button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on TUNE SCROLL knob Tuning Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to the left or right for manual tuning x Press
377. n The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section HEAD RESTRAINTS 2nd row outboard positions only A WARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 t 3 2 2 n LRS2020 LRS2073 LRS2074 The i
378. n is in the P position The 4LO indicator light must stop blink ing and remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear If the shift selector is shifted from the N position to any other gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking the vehicle may move unexpectedly 5 26 Starting and driving A CAUTION Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4LO and 4H while driving The 4H position provides greater trac tion Avoid excessive speed as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures and could damage drivetrain components Speeds over 62 MPH 100 km h in 4H is not recommended The 4LO position provides maximum power and traction Avoid raising ve hicle speed excessively as the maxi mum speed is approximately 31 MPH 50 km h When driving straight shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing Do not shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 2WD and 4H while driving on steep downhill grades Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears D1 or D2 for engine braking Do not operate the 4WD shift switch between 2WD and 4H with the rear wheels spinning Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear NISSAN recommends driving in the 2WD position under these conditions
379. n mechanical parking lock which 2 With the brake pedal depressed move the 4 will allow the vehicle to roll Do not leave shift selector to the N position May blink the transfer shift position in Neutral 2 3 With the brake pedal depressed depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BE 4 wheels For use when maximum power and trac TWEEN 4H AND 4LO OR 4LO TO 4H UNLESS Illuminated tion is required for example on stee YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE DE grades or rocky sandy muddy ivads PRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL 3 Before moving the shift selector from neutral wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady the transfer gear may grind not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position If the 4WD warning light illuminates perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition 1 Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch OFF 2 Start the engine Check that the 4WD warning light turns off If the 4WD light illuminates have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 3 Apply the parking brake depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position 4 With the brake pedal depressed move the 4WD shift
380. n or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper oil type is used and main tenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine
381. nce service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on it You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also
382. nces Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM s
383. nd construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully Be sure to check the brakes immedi ately after driving in mud or water See Brake system later in this section for Wet brakes Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward backward or sideways you could be injured Whenever you drive off road through sand mud or water as deep as the wheel hub more frequent maintenance may be required See Periodic mainte nance in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING Never remove the ignition key or place the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving The steering wheel will lock for models without NISSAN ve hicle immobilizer system This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious ve hicle damage or personal injury Starting and driving 5 9 OFF WSD0041 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position and the key cannot be removed until the shift selector is moved to the P Park position When removing the key from the ignition switch make sure the shift selector is in the P Park position If the shift selector is not returned to P Park position the ignition switch c
384. nd children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident e Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced CHILD SAFETY A WARNING Do not allow children to play with the seat belts Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac tor ALR mode seat belts If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child s neck with the ALR mode activated the child can be seriously injured or kil
385. ne 5 11 Jumpstarting 6 686 eee ee eae 6 8 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Push starting iere UR 6 10 Starting the engine 5 12 Steering Power steering fluid 8 12 Power steering system 5 32 Tilting steering wheel 3 14 Stoplight x xs ex eal hee ae ee 8 29 Storage soco cu srp t o o bw a 2 42 Lockable bedside storage compartment 2 50 Overhead storage compartment 2 46 Steragebin llle 2 47 Storage tray ssa kee eee eee ewes 2 42 Sunglassescase lt e eaog d ongi ki a Ri 2 45 SUNROOF aes ea s RE Kex ws 2 54 Sunroof see Moonroof 2 54 Sun VISOIS i e os ek oorr a 3 15 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 61 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 62 2 18 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 54 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 61 Precautions on supplemental restraint System ur ws om Se we x gud 1 47 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1 47 Switch Autolight switch iss 2 31 Automatic power window switch 2 52 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch llle 2 36 Foglight switch 00 2 33 Hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 30 Headlight control switch 2 30 Ighition Switch ug ser TER 5 9 Power do
386. necting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle 4 110 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this sec tion Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone System Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and connecting You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed
387. new text sound will be muted Show Incoming Text Select Driver Only to have incoming text messages displayed only in the vehicle infor mation display Select Both to have incom ing text messages displayed in both the ve hicle information display and the center display screen Select None to have no display of incoming text messages Edit Custom Messages Select to set a custom message that will be available with the standard options when sending a text message To set a custom message send a text message to your own phone number while the phone is connected to the system Three custom messages can be set Custom messages can only be set while the vehicle is stationary Auto Reply Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func tion When enabled the vehicle will auto matically send a predefined text message to the sender when a text message is received while driving Auto Reply Message Select to choose the message that is sent when the Auto Reply function is enabled Choose from I m Driving or one of the three custom messages stored in the system Vehicle Signature On Off Select to choose whether or not the vehicle signature is added to outgoing text mes sages from the vehicle This message can not be changed or customized MANUAL CONTROL While using the Voice Recognition system it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands The manu
388. ng appears in the odometer when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled It may take a few driving trips for the message to be dis played To turn off the warning perform the following 1 Remove and install the fuel filler cap as pre viously described as soon as possible 2 Tighten the fuel filler cap until it clicks 3 Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but ton on the instrument panel located be hind the steering wheel for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tightening the fuel filler cap Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT if so equipped LPD0254 LPD0255 TILT OPERATION AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired posi tion Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad justed for driving comfort Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the brake and accelerator pedal position away from the driver 1 or toward the driver 2 The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad justed separately A WARNING Do not adjust the pedal position while driving You can lose control of your ve hicle and cause an accident 3
389. ng audio without Navigation System in this section 11 j lined f psa FAM ae aa H s AUX tion ui p gt i For more information about the USB interface available with this system see USB interface models without Navigation System in this sec 6 one nut tion For more information about the Pandora audio feature available with this system see Pandora audio in this section 7 LHA2500 Type B 1 4 CD eject button 6 TUNE knob AUDIO button 2 FM AM button 7 Display screen 3 AUX button 8 ON OFF button VOL volume 4 CD insert slot 9 5 BACK button 4 52 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems M4 Backward seek button and PPI Forward seek button 10 CD button 11 XM button No satellite radio reception is available when the XM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Type B if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL volume ON OFF button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the ON OFF button while the System is off to call up the mode radio CD AUX Bluetooth audio USB or iPod9 that was playing
390. ng procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve hicle NOTE Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth devices If your phone does not connect automatic ally to the system consult the phone s Owner s Manual for details on device op eration You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connect ing instructions You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio
391. ng side winds Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires even with 4WD engaged For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury e Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per sonal injury Accelerating quickly sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control If at all possible avoid sharp turning maneuvers particularly at high speeds Your NISSAN four wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car The vehicle is not de signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could re sult in loss of control and or a rollover accident Always use tires of the same type size bra
392. nition systems 3 Select the Phone amp Bluetooth key 2 BLUETOOTH SETUP Phone Settings Connect New Device Select Connected Device Replace Connected Device Delete Connected Device P Network Name e Phone Name LHA2265 LHA2297 LHA2279 4 Select the Connect New Device key VEHICLE PHONEBOOK 3 Choose the desired entry from the displayed 5 Initiate the connecting process from the To access the vehicle phonebook list handset The system will display the mes NOTE sage Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your Bluetooth device If the PIN is displayed on your Bluetooth device select Yes to complete the connecting process For more information see the Bluetooth de vice s Owner s Manual 1 Pressthe button on the control panel 2 Select the Phonebook key To scroll quickly through the list touch the A Z key in the upper right corner of the screen Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to choose a letter or number and then press ENTER The list will move to the first entry that begins with that number or letter 4 The number of the entry will be displayed on the screen Touch the number to initiate di aling Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 113 p Network Name e Phone Name LHA2297 MAKING A CALL To make a call follow the procedure below 1 Press the button on the instrument panel The Phone screen will appear
393. nnounces the next set of available commands 3 Say Phone Number B The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Special Number to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters 4 Saythe number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format C If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 3 digit prefix and the last 4 digits For ex ample 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 89 four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Number See How to say num bers in this section for more information 5 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the available commands 6 Say Dial D The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands in this section Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone press the amp button on the steering wheel Once the call has ended press the button on the steering wheel NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the button on the steering wheel For addi
394. not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners FLOOR MATS A WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury e NEVER place a floor mat on top of an other floor mat in the driver front position e Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your ve hicle model See your NISSAN dealer for more information Properly position the mats in the floor well using the floor mat positioning aid See Floor mat positioning aid in this section The use of gen
395. nowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious accidents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s door is opened during this period of time the power to the windows is canceled WIC0845 ooh wWON Window lock button Power door lock switch Front passenger side automatic switch Right rear passenger window switch Left rear passenger window switch Driver side automatic switch Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows To open a window push the switch and hold it down To close a window pull the switch and hold it up To stop the opening or closing function at any time simply release the switch Instruments and controls 2 51 LICO580 LICO581 LIC0410 Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch and hold it down QD To close the window pull the switch up 2 2 52 Instruments and controls Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the wind
396. nstalling the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated Lower the ve hicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose e Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft Ib 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval In case of emergency 6 7 Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has b
397. nt is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur ized tank When installing the cap tighten If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing A WARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot e Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL LDI0370 LDI0371 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature
398. nternal temperature fuse may open e When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet 120V OUTLET if so equipped LIC0617 In truck box if so equipped LIC2433 Center console if so equipped Before Drive idling Park When shifting out of Park When shifting back to idling Park Options What is plugged IN Indicator Inverter Indicator Inverter Indicator Inverter Indicator Status Status Nothing plugged but switch is on 150 and 400 ON 150 ON Switch Reset Inverter Status Status 150 and 400 ON NOT NOT NECESSARY NECESSARY Device lt 150W 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOT NOT NECESSARY NECESSARY OFF ON ON 150 and 400 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in Therefore the switch indicators and inverter would re main OFF There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on but once the inverter reaches it s peak saturation point temp and power level it will shut off both the inverter and the switch indicators 150W gt device lt 400W 150 and 400 ON Device gt 400W 150 and 400 Instruments and controls 2 41 STORAGE Do not use the outlet located in the truck box with e Push the plug in as far as it will go If accessories that exceed 120 volt Do
399. nuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is used follow the coolant manufacturer s instructions to maintain minimum anti freeze protection to 34 F 37 C The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system The life expectancy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of cool ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue includ ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or the use of non distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill cool ant Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for more details Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 iy v Po X JL STIS oF C ER ra LDI0369 CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue The life expectancy of the factory fill coola
400. nute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal function For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section in this manual A WARNING e If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible e If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and in crease the likelihood of tire failure Se rious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could re sult in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire re place it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be
401. o grams The DVD will go back the number of times the button is pressed EIGENS When the PLAY PAUSE button on the player or the PAUSE button on the remote control is pressed the player will pause playing of the media In pause mode the player will show Il on the upper left corner of the display until the player is changed to another mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 77 B STOP Press the STOP button once to stop playing the media The display will show W in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds and the last disc position will be stored When the PLAY button is pressed again it will resume at the stored disc track and time position If the STOP button is pressed again when the player is already in Stop mode it will reinitialize the pointer to the beginning of the disc In effect it will ignore the last stored disc position and upon receipt of the next play message will begin atthe Title Menu or at the beginning of the disc 4A EJECT When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVD loaded it will be ejected The display will show the EJECT symbol 4 in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the EJECT button is pressed If the DVD is not loaded the display will show NO DISC If the DVD comes out and is not removed within 25 seconds it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it DISPLAY If the DISPLAY control is pressed for
402. o nine seven pause pause three oh eight cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one record name four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phonebook list names call eight oh five four one correction connect phone dial seven four oh one eight previous entry delete dial nine seven two six six call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven MANUAL CONTROL While using the voice recognition system it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re cent Calls lists To re activate voice recognition exit the manual control mode by pressing and holding the PHONE END 4 button At that time pressing the PHONE SEND e button will start the Hands Free Phone System Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 95 Operating tips To enter manual control mode start the voice recognition system and tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will speak Showing Manual Options when manual controls are initially activated To browse the menu options tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will always speak the current menu option De pending on the audio display
403. o device with a Pandora application must be connected to the system for this command to be functional Bluetooth Switches the audio system to the Bluetooth audio mode A compatible Bluetooth audio device must be connected to the system for this command to be func tional AUX Switches the audio system to the AUX mode An AUX device must be connected for this command to be functional For more information about the audio system see Audio system in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 123 INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the information functions of the Navigation Sys tem Traffic Current Weather Weather Forecast Google Send To Car POIs Powered by Google For more information about these commands see the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual HELP VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands can be spoken to have the system provide instructions and tips for using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system List Commands What Can Say General Help Quit Exit 4 124 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with nu
404. o come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water Keep battery out of the reach of children e The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety spectacles and remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting e Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury Nia PS CNN Vehicle with battery for LA booster Cloth X WCE0054 AWARNING Always follow the instructions below Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles to bring their bat teries near each other Do not allow the two vehicles to touch 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se lector to P Park Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems lights heater air condi tioner etc Remove vent caps on the battery if so equipped Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard Connect jumper cables in the
405. o list the last five incoming calls to the vehicle If the call is from an entry in the phonebook the name will be displayed Otherwise the phone number of the incoming call will be dis played Say Dial to call the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number Say Next Entry or Previous Entry to move through the list of incoming calls Missed Calls Speak this command to list the last five missed calls to the vehicle If the call is from an entry in the phonebook the name will be displayed Otherwise the phone number of the missed call will be displayed Say Dial to call the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number Say Next Entry or Previous Entry to move through the list of missed calls Outgoing Calls Speak this command to list the last five outgoing calls from the vehicle If the call was to an entry in the phonebook the name will be displayed Otherwise the phone number of the outgoing call will be dis played Say Dial to call the number or Send Text to send a text message to that number Say Next Entry or Previous Entry to move through the list of outgoing calls Redial Speak this command to call the last number dialed Call Back Speak this command to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 103 Send Text Read Text For more information on these commands see
406. o operate the wiper at the following speed D Intermittent INT intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward Slower or Faster Also the inter mittent operation speed varies in accor dance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermit tent operation speed will be faster Instruments and controls 2 27 NOTE You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func tion for vehicles with navigation system Refer to Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner au dio and phone systems section later in this manual 2 Low LO continuous low speed operation 3 High HI continuous high speed opera tion Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep opera tion MIST of the wiper Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times AA WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield 2 28 Instruments and controls A CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the windshield washer reservoir is empty Do not fill the windshield washer reser voir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength So methyl alcohol based
407. o the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System press the amp button and confirm when prompted If supported by the phone the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System allows for call waiting functionality If a call is received while another call is already active a message will be displayed on the screen Press the button to hold the active call and switch to the second call Press the button to reject the second call While the second call is active pressing the amp button will allow the same commands that available during any call as well as two addi tional commands Switch Call Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the origi nal call End Other Call Speak this command to stay with the second call and end the original call Press the amp button to accept the call Press the button to reject the call ENDING A CALL To end an active call press the button TEXT MESSAGING A WARNING e Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use the feature while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle NOTE This feature is automatically disabled if the connected device does not support
408. o the chassis wiring harness to avoid contamination to the terminals which will lead to malfunction of the rear camera Insert the bracket back into the sill 6 Take the tailgate plug from the glove box and connect it to the tailgate wiring harness to avoid contamination which will lead to mal function of the rear camera Remove the tailgate See Removing the tailgate in this section E EL 209774 LPD0271 Removing the tailgate 1 Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera if so equipped See Disconnect ing the rear camera in this section Release the tailgate support cables A CAUTION The tailgate is heavy Two people should remove or install it Be careful not to drop it during removal After releasing the support cables do not let the tailgate rest on the bumper 3 Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle 4 Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge 5 Slide the tailgate out of the right side hinge Installing the tailgate 1 Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge 2 Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert into the left side hinge 3 Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and attach the tailgate support cables 4 For vehicles with rear camera Be sure the tailgate harness is not hanging below the tailgate and keep the tailgate open See Connecting the rear camera in this section before closing th
409. occupants in the camper The total cargo load should not exceed the truck s pay load weight rating and the camper s center of gravity should fall within the truck s recommended center of gravity location when installed A WARNING Overloading or improper loading can ad versely affect vehicle handling braking and performance and may lead to accidents PAYLOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY The vehicle payload weight capacity shown on the Tire and Loading Information label see Tire and Loading Information label in this section indicates the maximum total weight of passen gers optional equipment air conditioning trailer hitch etc and cargo that your vehicle is designed to carry Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Vehicle Loading Information earlier in this section for details Also check tires for proper inflation pressures See the Tire and Loading Information label MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on
410. oh For the best voice recognition phone dialing re sults say phone numbers as single digits Also full numbers can only be spoken for 800 For example you cannot say 555 6000 as five five five six thousand Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 121 BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System voice commands 1 Press the l button 2 Say Call and then a name in the vehicle phonebook to call that entry Otherwise say Phone to access various phone com mands If the Bluetooth has been set to Off the sys tem announces Bluetooth is off Would you like to turn Bluetooth on If no phone is connected to the system and the vehicle is stationary the system announces There is no phone connected Would you like to connect a phone now Say Yes to connect a phone All further Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System voice commands are only available if a phone is connected If a phone is connected and Bluetooth is set to On the following voice commands are avail able Dial Number Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed After the number is entered say Dial to initiate dialing Say Correction to correct the num ber entered Say Go Back to return to the main menu List Phonebook Starting with the first alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook the system prompts for an additional command S
411. om mand and the Send command during a call See List of voice commands and Special number in this section for more information Example 1 555 1212 123 One five five five one two one two star one two three Say plus for available only when using the Special Number command Say pause for a 2 second pause available only when storing a phone book number NOTE For best results say phone numbers as single digits The voice command Help is available at any time Please use the Help command to get information on how to use the system Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 87 LHA2454 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel t PHONE SEND Press the button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call You can also use the button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once See List of voice commands and During a call in this section for more information a PHONE END While the voice recognition system is active press and hold the 4 button for 5 seconds to quit the voice recognition system at any time TUNING SWITCH While using the voice recognition system tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the B
412. ome state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the sys tem also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section A WARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avo
413. on The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of the P Park position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position Oke E e amp e WSD0187 To move the shift selector m Shift while depressing the brake pedal C gt Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting console After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector out of the P Park position AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage If the key is turned to the OFF position
414. on in the compass display will illuminate 2 Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH 8 km h 3 After completing the circles the display should return to normal A CAUTION Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the compass e When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing 2 12 Instruments and controls WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS ABS amp Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light AT Automatic transmission check warning light CHECK ATP Automatic transmission park warning light EXz3 mode Brake warning light Charge warning light Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 4WD warning light 2323 model CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will come on EH BRAKE or O X G A paw Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light if so equipped Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light Electronic lock
415. on the lever 1 to open the console box lid Instruments and controls 2 43 LIC0621 LIC1371 Console box lock CENTER ARMREST STORAGE if so Use the master key to lock D or unlock 2 the equipped console box To access the center armrest storage area lower the center armrest and lift the lid 2 44 Instruments and controls LICO578 C E DT F LIC0567 GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove box lock if so equipped The valet key cannot be used A WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop SUNGLASSES HOLDER if so equipped To open the sunglasses holder push and release A WARNING e Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident A CAUTION Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses Instruments and controls 2 45 i Z LICO589 LICO575 LICO568 MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKET if so equipped Small bin if so equipped OVERHEAD CONSOLE if so The seatback pocket is located on the back of the driver s seat The pocket can be used to store equipped maps 2
416. or lock switch s 3 4 Power inverter switch 2 37 Rear sonar system off switch 2 38 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIG i0 cx x E pk mom nom SD d UR dnd 2 28 Turn signal switch iss 2 33 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off SWIMS e murum dover Ghee ay He ape ERA 2 36 Windshield wiper and washer switch 10 6 T Tachometer inc sgat fai kote Rue ee 2 6 Tailgate latch 2 ee ee 3 21 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 26 3 2 5 11 Three way catalyst 2 llle 5 2 Tie down hooks seres 3 25 Tilting steering wheel 00 3 14 Tire Flattilg xu m ae bear eee we Abed 6 2 Sparetire slo bees eae es 6 4 Tire and Loading Information label 9 12 Tire ChainS oi won ea a hok ROS 8 40 Wire placard eedem paw tba wed 9 12 Tire pressure lees 8 33 Tire rotation z sea ns oo ES 8 40 Tires of 4 wheel drive ss 8 42 Typesoftires 5 2 RR 8 39 Uniform tire quality grading 9 39 Wheels and tires ls 8 33 Wheel tiresize lese 9 9 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Towing 2 wheel drive models 6 12 4 wheel drive models sss 6 13 Flattowing se
417. or lock switch driver s or front passenger s side LPD0242 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Crew Cab models only Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the LOCK position the door can be opened only from the outside REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM if so equipped A WARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use e The remote keyless entry keyfob trans mits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and com munication systems Do not operate the remote keyless entry keyfob while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight It is possible to lock unlock all doors turn on the interior lights and puddle lights if so equipped and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle Some settings for the keyfob such as horn beep can be adjusted For vehicles without navigation system refer to Silencing the horn beep feature in this section For vehicles with navigation sys tem refer to Vehicle electronic systems in the
418. orth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incorrect disposal pro cedures could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 63 2 instruments and controls Instrument panel errem Rx nn 2 2 Meters and gauges iiis nas 2 4 Speedometer and odometer iussus 2 5 Tachomelter iss roser rotirea ee erred eas 2 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Fuel GAUGE seietan bob PUO ORDEI 2 7 Engine oil pressure gauge if so equipped 2 7 Voltmeter if so equipped 0 eee eee ee 2 8 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge if so equipped 0 0 e cece eee eee 2 8 Compass display if so equipped suus 2 9 Compass display irese toisedarsse nemese pui 2 10 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 13 Checking bulbs leesesseeeeseeeesse 2 13 Warning lights 2 enr Rr me 2 13 Indicator lights eorr eh petet 2 18 Audible reminders 2 2 2 00000 cece n 2 20 Vehicle Information Display if so equipped 2 21 How to use the Vehicle Information Display 2 21 Security systems if so equipped Lise 2 25 Vehicle security system if so equipped 2 25 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system if so equipped 2 eee eee ee 2 26 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Switchioperationis eres uer ee ove toa es dae 2 27 Rear window and outside mirror if
419. ould be between the MAX and MIN lines Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself NOTE Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no start conditions such as 1 In stallation or extended use of electronic ac cessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running Phone chargers GPS DVD players etc 2 Vehicle is not driven regularly and or only driven short dis tances In these cases the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other flu
420. ow push the switch and hold it down D To close the window pull the switch up 2 Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation press the window switch down to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window automatically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is closing Auto reverse function The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs A WARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window If the vehicle s battery is disconnected replaced or jump started the power window auto reverse function may not operate properly If this occurs please contact the dealer to re initialize the powe
421. ow trailers that weigh over 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10 000 Ib 4 535 kg maximum weight rating but your ve hicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section 5th wheel gooseneck A 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be towed by installing a 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer hitch These types of hitches are mounted in the bed of the pick up A professional trailer equipment sup plier should install these hitches as it is very important to mount the hitch correctly to distrib ute the king pin weight for the proper load carry ing and sway control performance The king pin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the fully loaded trailer Make sure the king pin weight does not cause the gross vehicle weight to exceed the Gross Maximum Weight Rating or the rear axle weight to exceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight rating see Maximum load limits earlier in this section The weight of the trailer should not exceed the maximum towing capacity for the vehicle see Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section Make sure the trailer design allows for the correct vehicle to trailer clearances before purchasing a 5th wheel trailer A CAUTION Special hitches which include frame re inforcements are required for towing above 2 000 Ib 907 kg Suitable genu ine NI
422. ow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower A WARNING Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection e Disconnect and properly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury e Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury To use the engine block heater 1 2 Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temper
423. p ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift selector to P Park e Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts lt is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery On gasoline engine models the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off A CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of
424. pant and objects on the right front seat by weight It works together with seat belt sensors described later For example if a child is in the right front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat its weight and the child s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF Occupant classification sensor operation can vary depend ing on the right front passenger seat belt sensors The front passenger seat belt sensors are de signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt such as when it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension de tected on the seat belt the Advanced Air Bag System determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant takes his her weight off the seat cush ion for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position
425. peat pattern is applied To cancel Repeat mode touch the Repeat key until no Cy icon is displayed PE l Seek buttons Press the seek button M4 or P to skip backward or forward one track Press and hold the seek button M4 or PPI for 1 5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the track returns to normal play speed LHA2279 Scrolling menus While navigating long lists of artists albums or songs in the music menu it is possible to scrol the list by the first character in the name To activate character indexing touch and hold the A Z key in the upper right corner of the screen Turn the TUNE knob to choose the number or letter to jump to in the list and then press the ENTER button If no character is selected after two seconds the display returns to normal 4 66 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files the device can be connected to the vehicle s audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle s speakers Bluetooth Bass Treble Balance Fade LHA2257 Setting Bluetooth Bluetooth Add phone or Device Del
426. peed Sensitive Volume Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicle s driving speed changes The feature can be turned off or set to a level of 1 to 5 Level 5 represents the highest degree of volume adjustment AUX Vol Choose a setting from 0 to 3 to control the boost of the incoming auxiliary device volume A setting of O provides no additional boost in vol ume A setting of 3 provides the greatest boost in volume Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen Clock Adjust Press the ENTER button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE SCROLL knob to adjust the value Press the ENTER button again to set the value Setting On Screen Clock RDS Display Language Select LHA2259 On Screen Clock Select ON or OFF to control whether or not the clock is shown in the upper right corner of the display screen RDS Display Select ON or OFF to control whether or not RDS information is displayed on the screen while the radio is playing Language Select Select the desired language for the system Eng lish Spanish and French are the available lan guages iPod MENU button This button can only be used for iPod opera tions See iPod player operation without Navi gation System later in this section for details about the function of this button FM AM SAT radio operatio
427. pen ing the doors and will help keep out intruders Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents WPD0311 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY Manual if so equipped To lock a door turn the key toward the front of the vehicle 1 To unlock turn the key toward the rear LPD0240 Power if so equipped The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front 1 of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral 3 where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 Opening and closing windows The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked Toclose the windows turn the driver s door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when
428. peration have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible e Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads in the 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N posi tion with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD 2 16 Instruments and controls If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Ky Low fuel warning light This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is conve nient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty I Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also
429. placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof Occurs A WARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof A WARNING in an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening Do not place heavy o
430. playing when the XM button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on om C1 CAT XXXXX CH XXXXX XXxxxxxx D XXXXXXXX LHA1492 FM1 P3 XX X MHz CARRE peep 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 LHA1489 While the radio is in XM mode the operation can be controlled through the touchscreen Touch the Channels key to display a list of channels Touch a channel displayed on the list to change to that channel Touch the Categories key to display a list of categories Touch a category displayed on the list to display options within that category Tuning with the touchscreen When in AM or FM mode the radio can be tuned using the touchscreen To bring up the visual tuner touch the Tune key on the lower right corner of the screen A screen appears with a bar running from low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on the right Touch the screen at the location of the frequency you wish to tune and the station will change to that frequency To return to the regular radio display screen touch the OK key Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 Tuning with the TUNE knob The radio can also be manually tuned using the TUNE knob When in FM or AM mode turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies When in XM mode turn
431. points You can also shift manually As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back ON If 1 The engine coolant temperature is not re duced 2 The air conditioning cooling function does not turn back ON 3 The engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light illumi nates this may indicate a malfunction Move the vehicle off the road in a safe area and allow the engine to cool If after checking the oiland coolant the remains on do not continue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer The malfunction indicator light MIL may also come ON If only it remains on you do not need to have your vehicle towed but have it inspected soon by a NISSAN dealer See Malfunction in dicator light MIL in the Instruments and con trols section of this manual A WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road in a safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Running the engine with
432. position indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this indicator shows the shift selector position See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual Loose fuel cap warning This warning appears when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled See Fuel filler cap in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Check tire pressure warning This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected If this warning appears stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Low tire pressure warning light earlier in this section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section SECURITY SYSTEMS if so equipped LIC0644 Your vehicle may have two types of security sys tems Vehicle security system if so equipped NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System if so equipped VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM if so equipped The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the
433. pped ssss 4 11 How to read the displayed lines 4 12 Difference between predicted and actual distante ssh ke ore Rd Ren dba eec ade 4 12 Adjusting the screen leise 4 15 Operating tips eiiie re csert eR bea ed reb be 4 16 Mc TULIT 4 17 Heater and air conditioner manual Type A if so equipped 66 eect eee eee 4 17 ContOlsie iiss arr ix erga Ere ett RPG 4 18 Heater operation secs seme e rer Rn 4 19 Air conditioner operation sess 4 20 Air Now eha Sereen rer nie hebes 4 21 Heater and air conditioner manual Type B if so equipped 6 eect eee nee eee ee 4 25 Conittols eh eiwivadel eas DOR ORE ER Heater operation cc ess rte e der Re Rn Air conditioner operation lsssseesses Air flow charts uenen netter mer grees Ead Heater and air conditioner automatic if so equipped 0 cece cette eee ees Automatic operation csere eee dake eee iss Manual operation surgia eee eene Operating tips Servicing air conditioner 0 0 0005 Audio System 2 neto ne DR UON e Radio scil thizekehPuEEeAee eiXGd Rerieddd FM radio reception lee AM radio reception 006 ccc cece eene Satellite radio reception if so equipped Audio operation precautions 0008 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player if so equipped 6 eee eee eee FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player Type A if
434. r gency section in this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft lb 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval A WARNING e After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc e Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet WDIO0259 1 2 Tire wear and damage Wear indicator Location mark A WARNING e Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prev
435. r replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pres sure warning system e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires
436. r vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used f the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat Booster seat installation on front passenger seat and rear seat A CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety Child Restraints and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat P WRS0699 1 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position 2 Position the booster seat on the s
437. r window auto reverse system If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing the window will be immediately low ered WIC0263 LIC0627 MANUAL WINDOWS if so equipped The side windows can be opened or closed by turning the hand crank on each door REAR SLIDING WINDOW if so equipped Squeeze the handles of the lever then slide the window open 2 Instruments and controls 2 53 LIC1553 REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH if so equipped To open the rear power window push in and hold the switch To close the rear power window pull out and hold the switch To stop the opening or closing function at any time simply release the switch 2 54 Instruments and controls NOTE If the rear power window if so equipped is lowered while the defroster switch is on the rear window defroster will automati cally shut off The heated outside mirrors if so equipped will remain on The rear win dow defroster will automatically turn on when the rear power window is fully closed if the switch is on MOONROOF if so equipped On UP OPEN tO ASTO SO JEO DOWN CLOSE l TO WIC0812 AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for a period of time even if the ignition switch i
438. rake 2 Turn the engine off 3 Place alarge drain pan under the oil filter amp 4 Loosen the oil filter amp with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 5 Wipethe engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag A CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage 6 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil 7 Screwon the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn 8 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required 9 Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary 5 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing A CAUTION Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora tion in driveability and automatic trans mission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty T
439. rature turn the dial to the left To increase the temperature turn the dial to the right Air recirculation button ON position Push the button to recirculate air inside the vehicle Push the GY button to the on position when driving on a dusty road to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas senger compartment for maximum cooling when using the air con ditioner The air recirculation mode is only functional when the air flow control mode is in the following gt or e positions vad OFF position Push the C amp button again to turn air recircula tion off Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the se lected outlet Use the off position for normal heater or air con ditioner operation Air conditioner button Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push the A C button to turn on the air conditioner The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating To turn off the air conditioner push the A C button again The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets Some air also flows from the defrost outlets 1 Press the CS button to the OFF position for normal heating The indicator light on the CS button will go off 2 Press the yi air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control
440. require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 27 LRS0429 LATCH system lower anchor locations LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint LATCH lower anchor A WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instruc tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in jury or death of a child or other passen gers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly Inspect the lower anchors by insert ing your fingers into the lower anchor area Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors su
441. resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see Forward facing child restraint in stallation using the seat belts later in this section Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seri ously injure or kill a child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as pos sible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re straint while in the vehicle e When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or colli sion loose objects can injure occu
442. riodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the front wheels in correct alignment Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag For vehicles equipped with use 4H or 4L position only when necessary Four wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy CXI USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD if so equipped A WARNING For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage
443. ront air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system on indicator light if so equipped This light comes on when the electronic locking rear differential E Lock system clutch is fully engaged The indicator light flashes when the system is first turned on When the system fully engages the light remains on If the switch is on and the indicator light continues to flash the system is not engaged For additional information see Electronic lock ing rear differential E Lock system switch later in this section and Electronic locking rear differ ential E Lock system in the Starting and driv ing section of this manual AG Front passenger air bag status ote light The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual High beam indicator light
444. running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction The driver must not attempt to wear the head phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation While playing video CD media this DVD player does not guarantee complete functionality of all video CD formats With the DVD player you can hear DVD videos video CDs and CDs using headphones Passen gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde pendently of the front seat Press the AUX button located on the front con trols to hear the sound of the DVD play through the speakers Itis possible to operate the DVD player by remote control Headphones are a wireless type and no cables are necessary You can use them in almost all the ranges in the rear seat It is not possible to use the headphones in the front seat POWER on off button With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position press the POWER button to turn the DVD player on or off Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted the DVD player will automatically turn on A CAUTION Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player MODE
445. ry see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM WDIO566 A CAUTION Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will by pass the variable voltage control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable If you add elec trical accessories to your vehicle be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area DRIVE BELT 2 3 1 Q er i 6 WDI0661 1 Power steering fluid pump 2 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Water pump 4 Cooling fan 5 Air conditioner compressor 6 Crankshaft pulley 7 Generator AWARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear cuts fra
446. s 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is Clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and windshield washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least when ever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Check that all doors are closed Position seat and adjust head restraints Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi tion See Warning indicator lights and au dible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Starting and driving 5 11 STARTING THE ENGINE NOTE Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no start conditions such as 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended Ifthe engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator p
447. s do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature e Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dr
448. s m eges 9 39 Towing load specification 9 28 Towtrucktowing sess 6 11 Trailer towing 2 xo Bex ees 9 24 Tow mode switch 0005 2 38 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 58 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission 5 14 Shift selector lock release 5 19 Travel See registering your vehicle in another GOURT q y e Bae ed ee ee 9 10 Trpodometer 5 sse ee RR 2 5 Truck camperloading 9 22 Turn signal switch i aae 2 33 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 39 USB interface Audio file operation 4 59 4 61 v Vanity mirror s ce tea naaa ma aora 3 15 Variable voltage control system 8 16 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 9 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 36 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 35 Vehicle identification s 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number lll 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Vehicle loading information 9 13 Vehiclerecovery lese 6 13 Vehicle security system 2 25 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 26 3 2 5 11 Ventilators 2 eder ehh eee E 4 17 VIS OF Shs ay edie eduxi S d eee e diem e Ha 3 15 Voice recognition system 4 119 Voltmeterz uium eben pe bee A 2 8 Ww
449. s and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including pre scription or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli sions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt OFF ROAD RECOVERY If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally leave the road surface maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to t
450. s are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im pacted They may not inflate in certain side colli sions Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers As a result certain vehicle movements for example during severe off roading may cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants Curtain and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra sions or other injuries Side
451. s and warning indicator lights P 2 4 2 13 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 5 21 Shift selector column if so equipped P 5 16 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 27 Navigation system if so equipped P 4 4 Climate controls P 4 17 P 4 25 P 4 32 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 47 Glove box P 2 45 Storage tray P 2 45 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped Front passenger air bag status light P 1 56 Power outlet P 2 39 Heated seat switch if so equipped P 2 34 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off switch P 2 36 Tow mode switch P 2 38 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system switch if so equipped P 2 36 Shift selector console if so equipped P 5 16 Hazard warning flasher switch P 6 2 Power outlet P 2 39 4WD shift switch if so equipped P 5 27 Ignition switch P 5 9 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 14 Cargo lamp switch if so equipped P 2 34 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P 2 38 Pedal posi tion adjustment switch if so equipped P 3 14 Rear power window switch if so equipped P 2 54 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS Aa N D
452. s placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of time the power to the moonroof is canceled Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch to ward the open position 3 To fully close the moonroof push the switch toward the close position 4 To open or close the moonroof part way push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding open or closed to stop it in the desired position Tilting the moonroof To tilt the moonroof up push the tilt switch to ward the up position 1 To tilt the moonroof down push the tilt switch toward the down position 2 Restarting the moonroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected the electri cal supply interrupted and or some abnormality detected Use the following reset procedure to return moonroof operation to normal 1 If the moonroof lid is open push the tilting Switch repeatedly toward the down position 2 to fully close the lid 2 Push and hold the tilting switch for more than 2 seconds toward the down position 2 to reestablish the lid s home position The moonroof should now operate normally Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is
453. s the CAMERA button 2 Select the Show Guidelines key to toggle the feature on or off 4 12 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects LHA2326 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill the dis tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place amp but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on the hill is the place B Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor LHA2327 Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 the position if the object projects over the the hill is the place B Note that any object on actual backing up course the hill is closer than it appears on the moni
454. se or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The CJ light should turn off after a few driving trips If the C1 light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction Indicator Light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Instruments and controls 2 19 A CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system Security indicator light if so equipped This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational For additional information see Security sys tems later in this section R Slip indicator light This indicator will
455. seat or if two children are on the Seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the right front passenger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an
456. seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your ab dominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR A WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly e Do not allow children to play with the seat belts Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR mode seat belts If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child s neck with the ALR mode acti vated the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight This can occur even if the vehicle is parked Unbuckle the seat be
457. section for details Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0431 Do not lean against doors or windows AWARNING Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bags and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags The side air bags and curtain and roll over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear im pact or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents 1 51 el 1 a NN lt gt SS LRS0396 SSS0162 Do not lean against doors or windows Do not lean against doors or windows 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING The seat belts the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations LRS0421 SSS0159 AA WARNING e Wh
458. sekrbnese emere kt otal 8 12 Brake fl idi 52 22 nue IER IER Ex ER 8 13 Windshield washer fluid 0 00sec eee 8 13 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 8 13 Battery ses heinous Hawa REP ER he delete dandus 8 14 Jump starting sce severe mee eed reet a 8 15 Variable voltage control system 00 00 8 16 Drive Deky rose uode Ine Sin donety Rer PE 8 16 Spatkplugs s ios sean De EMI aes es DU e uk 8 17 Replacing spark plugs sss 8 17 AIF CICAN CR ses voccs cere exEP Rdeeer deed es 8 18 In cabin microfilter if so equipped 8 18 Windshield wiper blades esses 8 20 Cleaning MEE ree 8 20 REPLACING irr rise RREb eun Eee biet 8 20 Brakes oonan nana da Se his xq Mages Darse 8 21 gl C 8 22 Engine compartment sess cssisocsrees erresis 8 22 Passenger compartment issrecrirtsrrses 8 24 Battery replacement csse 8 26 Keyfob if so equipped 0 eee eee eee ee 8 26 Lights ace decreed ts cme dnc ated pte etate tenis 8 27 Headlights iesise chased xoa ime bee 8 27 Fog lights if so equipped sisse 8 28 Exterior and interior lights 0 008 8 29 Wheels and tires 2 2 nmm 8 33 Tire pr ss te scs tor eir Rb Reve 8 33 Tire labeling ok enon een 8 37 TYPOS Of tI6S i e Shores RERO DIT ERO D rbS 8 39 Tire chains us seems Sete p aya ares aca Red 8 40 Changing wheels and tires 00000e 8 40 MAINTENANCE
459. select button Press the MODE button to select Audio Video source between DVD and AUX input input jacks on the faceplate Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input and Yellow Video input The display will show the AUX in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the Mode is changed to AUX To use the input jacks refer to Auxiliary input jacks in this section Ci or gt PLAY When the PLAY PAUSE button on the player or the PLAY button on the remote control is pressed the player will play In play mode the display will briefly show gt on the upper left corner of the display gt gt 4 FF Fast Forward REW Remote control only Press the FAST FORWARD FAST REVERSE buttons to carry out the fast forward or fast re verse presentation at 5 times normal play speed Press the FAST FORWARD FAST REVERSE buttons again or PLAY button to resume the normal play speed I44 gt gt NEXT CHAPTER PREVIOUS CHAPTER Remote con trol only When the PPI NEXT CHAPTER button is pressed while the DVD is playing the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through programs The DVD will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the I PREVIOUS CHAPTER button is pressed the program being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through pr
460. sible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire e When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle f a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle If a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing t
461. sic 120GB firmware version 2 0 1PC or later iPod Nano 1st generation firmware ver sion 1 3 1 or later iPod Nano 2nd generation firmware ver sion 1 1 3 or later iPod Nano 3rd generation firmware ver sion 1 1 3PC or later iPod Nano 4th generation firmware ver sion 1 0PC or later 4 62 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems iPod Nano 5th generation 8GB firm ware version 1 0 2PC or later iPod Nano 5th generation 16GB firm ware version 1 0 1PC or later iPod Nano 6th generation 8GB firm ware version 1 2PC or later iPod Nano 6th generation 8GB firm ware version 1 1PC or later iPod Touch 1st generation firmware ver sion 2 2 1 or later iPod Touch 2nd generation firmware ver sion 2 2 1 or later iPod Touch 3rd generation firmware ver sion 3 1 3 or later iPod Touch 4th generation firmware ver sion 4 3 5 or later iPhone 3G firmware version 4 1 or later iPhone 3GS firmware version 4 3 or later iPhone 4 firmware version 5 0 or later iPhone 4S firmware version 5 1 or later iPad firmware version 4 3 2 or later iPad 2 firmware version 4 3 3 or later Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above Audio main operation Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position Then press the CD AUX or iPod MENU button repeat
462. so equipped Lus FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player Type B if so equipped sse USB interface models without Navigation System if so equipped cece eee USB interface models with Navigation System a anaE cee uae denen tn Banana pelea iPod player operation without Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece eee eee eee iPod player operation with Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece eee eee ee Bluetooth streaming audio without Navigation System if so equipped Bluetooth streaming audio with Navigation System if so equipped a a esseere Pandora audio United States only if so equipped 6 6 eee eee eee CD care and cleaning 2 2000 e0ee Steering wheel switch for audio control if so equipped 2 6 e cece eee eee eee Antenna begun ee ta bein a NISSAN mobile entertainment system MES if so equipped 6 eect eee ee Digital video disc DVD player controls Remote CONTOl cade career ey Rae Ene E e veh oe Flip dOWN Screen s cesser erete e mene Playing a digital video disc DVD Care and maintenance 2 0005 4 80 How to handle the DVD 00 0008 4 80 Car phone or CB radio 00 eee eee eee 4 83 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System without Navigation System Type A if so equipped 4 83 Regulatory Information
463. supplemental front impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The supplemental front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions al though they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor the Air Bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors occupant clas Sification sensor pressure sensor and right front passenger seat belt tension sensor Inflator op eration is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the right front passenger it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Addition ally the right front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the weight detected on the pas senger seat and how the seat belt is used If the front passenger air bag is OFF t
464. switch to desired mode Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position While changing in and out of 4LO the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights 4WD shift and 4LO position indicator to be operable Otherwise the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The S indicator light will also turn on when 4LO is selected See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system later in this section Starting and driving 5 25 The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions There are three types of drive modes available 2WD 4H and 4LO The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation Rotate the switch to move between each mode 2WD 4H and 4LO To change into or out of 4LO the vehicle MUST be stationary shift the shift selector to neutral and depress the brake pedal The switch must be pushed and turned to select 4LO AA WARNING When parking apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning light goes off Otherwise the vehicle could unexpect edly move even if the automatic trans missio
465. t 1 6 buttons 6 FM AM button 12 SEEK buttons FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section Audio main operation Power button and VOL control knob Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position then press the PWR power button If you listen to the radio with the engine not running place the ignition switch in the ACC position The mode radio or CD that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes play ing When no CD is loaded the radio comes on Pressing the PWR button again turns the system off Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume MENU button BASS TREBLE FADE BALANCE and CLOCK Press the MENU button to change the mode as follows BAS TRE FAD BAL CLOCK Audio BAS Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 To adjust Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the MENU button until the desired mode appears in the display Press the SEEK button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the MENU button repe
466. t any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN S CHAIR SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped ARS1152 AA WARNING e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and e After adjustment gently rock in the seat receive serious internal injuries to make sure it is securely locked e Do notleave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0419 LRS0420 WRS0847 Forward and backward Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seat
467. t functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems BRAKE or Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the ve hicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer A WARNING e Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous e Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Anti lock Braking System ABS warning indicator When the parking
468. t lan guage Press the l button For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language in this section Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions pro vided by the system When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press the amp button The VA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system When training is finished the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded 10 The system will announce that voice adap tation has been completed and the system is ready The VA mode will stop if e The st buttonis pressed for more than 5 seconds in VA mode The vehicle begins moving during VA mode The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the VA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phonebook transfer entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number incoming transfer entry eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phonebook delete entry next entry dial star two one seven oh yes no select missed dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on outgoing call three one nine oh tw
469. tarting and driving Additional information e The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving Thelow tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After your tires are inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap pears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illumi nated and low tire pressure is detected The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pr
470. tation is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist
471. te control only Press the ANGLE button to call up the camera angle menu Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle through each available angle CLEAR Remote control only Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric inputs if actuated prior to expiration of the 3 second timer NUMERIC KEYPAD 0 9 amp 10 Remote control only Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access disc chapters titles or tracks by inputting their numeric value Use the 10 button to input numbers greater than or equal to 10 Up to three digits can be inputted when selecting the chapter title track number The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will continuously shift the previously input number to the left The chapter title track number will be automati cally selected if valid based on media content if 3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs The operator can cancel the input chapter title track number by actuating the CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the 3 second timer These functions can be used only for the DVD discs which correspond to them Auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located on the control panel Compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica tion purposes Yellow video input White left channel audio input Red right channel audio input
472. te methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer ow A LRS0242 Front seats Shoulder belt height adjustment front outboard seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out 1 the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor 2 to the desired position so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Re lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position A WARNING After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of
473. tem checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury e Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 17 PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The
474. tempt to use a DVD that has been cracked deformed or repaired using adhesive Doing so may cause damage to the equipment Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami nation or flaws Otherwise signals may not be read properly Do not write draw or attach anything on any side of the DVD Donotstore the DVD in locations with direct sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity Always place discs in the storage case when they are not being used Do not put on any sticker or write anything on either surface of the DVD LHA0484 DVD player operation precautions Do not use the following DVDs as they may cause the DVD player to malfunction 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter e DVDs with a region code other than 1 The region code is displayed in a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD B e DVDs that are not round e DVDs with a paper label e DVDs that are warped scratched or have unequal edges e Recordable digital video discs DVD R e Rewritable digital video discs DVD RW If a DVD with a paper label is used and becomes jammed you may be able to reset the unit and eject the jammed disc with the following procedure 1 Record the radio presets 2 Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery for five minutes 3 Reconnect the negative battery termi nal Check to see if the jammed DVD has been ejected If it has not try to
475. th extensions other than MP3 WMA mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the disc is protected by copyright P d uglir Check if the disc is scratched or dirty D E Bit rate may be too low It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MPS WMA disc or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts playing before the music starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the When a non MP3 WMA file has been given an extension of MP3 WMA mp3 or wma or when play is prohibited by copyright protection there next song when playing will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Music cuts o
476. the Message Access Profile MAP See the phone s Owner s Manual for details and instructions The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 105 Sending a text message To send one of the custom messages say se Custom Message If more than one cus 1 Press the button tom message is stored the system will 2 Say Send Text Phone 2064 Tall prompt for the number of the desired cus 3 The system will provide a list of available Send Text E j On ting and managing custom text messages commands in order to determine the recipi Driving can t text Running late see Bluetooth settings in this section ent of the text message Choose from the Oka following cat me Okay onmyway aname in e Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls LHA2296 Missed Calls 4 Once a recipient is chosen the system For more information about these options prompts for which message to send Five see Voice commands in this section predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages To choose one of the predefined messages speak one of the following Driving can t text Call me e On my way e Running late e Okay 4 106 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems XXXXXXXXXXXXXX 11 59AM read LHA2295
477. the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations It is recommended that before in stalling the camper you carefully read the follow ing information and ensure that the camper meets the specifications This information may not apply to some Canada model vehicles SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or camper bodies However this Owner s Manual does not cover these options For further infor mation please refer to the body manufacturer s instruction manual 9 22 Technical and consumer information Recommended cargo center of gravity i location WTI0195 LOCATION FOR CENTER OF GRAVITY The illustration indicates the recommended cargo center of gravity location King Cab short wheel base L1 43 9 in 1 115 7 mm Crew Cab long wheel base L1 47 9 in 1 215 7 mm A WARNING Improper loading may be dangerous If a load is too far back it can affect handling characteristics If a load is too far forward the front axle may be overloaded Camper center of gravity E C a Recommended cargo center of gravity location LTIO129 When the truck is used to carry a slide in camper the total cargo load of the truck consists of the camper manufacturer s weight figure plus the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the camper manufacturer s weight figure the weight of camper cargo and the weight of
478. the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play Qo XXXXXXXX D XXXXXXXX d XXXXXXXX Q xxx Browse LHA1488 Qo MP3 XXXXXXXX DED XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Q xxx Browse LHA1490 Qo MP3 XXXXXXXX O DXXXXXXXX d XXXXXXXX Q xxx Browse LHA1491 CD MP3 display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3 WMA CD certain text may be displayed when a CD en coded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or MP3 WMA CD is encoded the text is displayed listing the artist album and song title There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing Random Touch the Random key to apply a random play pattern to the CD When the random mode is active the icon will be displayed to the left of the song title If an MP3 CD is playing touch ing Random alternates between randomly play ing songs within the current folder and songs from the CD as a whole The D icon is dis played to the left of the song title or folder name to denote which pattern is applied To cancel Random mode touch the Random key until no 2X6 iconis displayed Repeat Touch the Repeat key to
479. the SEEK CAT button M4 or P to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds SCAN will appear on the screen while the radio is scan tuning l SEEK tuning Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds SCAN tuning moves to the next station 1 to 6 Station memory operations Six stations can be set for the AM band Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 Eighteen channels can be set for the satellite radio 6 for XM1 6 for XM2 6 for XM3 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the FM AM select button or choose the satellite band XM1 XM2 or XMG using the XM button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until the preset number is updated on the display and the sound is briefly muted 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations 4 50 Monitor climate audio phone and voic
480. the TUNE knob to change the chan nel x When in FM or AM mode press the seek buttons M or PP to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station l SEEK tuning When in XM mode press the seek buttons M or PM to change the category LHA2263 1 to 6 Station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 and six stations can be set for the AM band Eighteen stations can be set for the XM band 6 for XM1 6 for XM2 6 for XM3 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the FM AM select button or choose the radio band XM1 XM2 or XM3 using the XM button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual or seek tuning Press and hold any of the de sired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 56 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Presets can also be selected by touching the desired preset number on the screen Compact disc CD player operation If the radio is already operating it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play CD button When
481. the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so Starting and driving 5 13 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A WARNING Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse or L Low Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident Except in an emergency do not shift to the N Neutral position while driving Doing so can cause a loss of engine braking which may result in a collision serious personal injury or death In ad dition coasting with the transmission in the N Neutral position may cause serious damage to the transmission 5 14 Starting and driving ACAUTION e When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by de pressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operati
482. the key cylinder is released 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0241 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position D then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 ur E SE Q WPD0381 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH if so equipped To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position 1 When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position 2 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition switch and any door open all doors will lock and then unlock automatically This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle LPD0278 LPD0266 WIDE OPEN DOORS if so equipped A CAUTION Do not open the Wide Open door to the full open position while the fuel filler door is open only open it as far as the first detent Opening the door to the full open position may damage the fuel filler door and Wide Open door The Wide Open doors open ne
483. the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS A WARNING The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when
484. the procedures must be followed precisely A CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully APD1005 If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen lt S L If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle 6 5 9 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action 9 t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by
485. the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 1 2 3 4 5 o Ww o y o c 8 7 WHA1406 Type A 1 Fan speed control dial CONTROLS 2 Front window defroster button 3 Rear window defroster button Fan control dial 4 Airrecirculation button The fan control dial turns the fan on and off and 5 Temperature control dial controls fan speed 6 Max A C button 7 Air flow control buttons Air flow control buttons 8 Air conditioner ON OFF button The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets MAX Air flows from center and side A C vents with maximum cooling air conditioning 4 18 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 74 Air flows from center and side vents 474 Air flows from center and side vents and the front and rear floor outlets Air flows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets Air flows from defroster outlets and the front and rear floor outlets Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air To lower the tempe
486. tiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s 4 92 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number Delete Entry Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook After the system rec ognizes the command speak the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry List Names Use the List Names command to hear all the names in the phonebook The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the 4 button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session Phonebook phones with automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phonebook Speak
487. tion Note Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference in cluding interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the halogen headlight bulb The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your NISSAN dealer A CAUTION e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS e Do not leave the bulb out of the head light reflector for a long period of time as dust moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the per formance of the headlight Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 NOTE Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in th
488. tion of channel Applying loads at angles to the cleats greater then 45 or loads greater than 150 Ibs header and floor channels or 200 Ibs side channels may cause damage to the channel or bed Technical and consumer information 9 19 1 correct installation 2 incorrect installation AA WARNING Do not install accessories over the gap between the front and rear side channels Doing this could affect the rear structure in certain rear impacts which could result in serious injury 9 20 Technical and consumer information LTIO123 WTIO0119 A CAUTION Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting Use the channel end stoppers to help se cure items in the channels from sliding off the end of the truck bed Channel end stoppers The channel end stoppers should be used to help prevent accessories installed in the channels from sliding or shifting off the end of the truck bed They must be installed so they are properly seated in the detents in the channel Install the channels end stoppers as follows A WARNING e Properly secure all cargo with Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe 1 Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed Properly store the channel protectors Loosen the bolt on the center of the end stopper with the provided
489. tion or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so A CAUTION If you move the shift selector to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur l 2 Apply and hold the brake pedal Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load Apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into P Park Make sure the dio indicator light if so equipped indicates the transfer case is in 4H 4L or 2H and that the ATP light is off If the on indicator light is flashing or the ATP light is ON make sure the transmission is in P Park A T and turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H See Automatic transmission park warning light in the Instruments and 7 controls section and Using four wheel drive AWD in the Starting and driving section Turn off the engine To drive away a
490. tional command options see List of voice commands later in this section LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call Phonebook Recent Calls Connect Phone When you press and release the amp button on the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking After the main menu you can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response 4 90 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Call Main Menu Call Speak name Phone Number Speak Digits Special Number Redial Call Back Speak name If you have stored entries in the phonebook you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phonebook in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phone
491. tments 3 27 SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the adjusting switch for the driver s seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position When no seat position is stored in the memory switch When the shift selector is moved from P Park to any other position When the driver s door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled For vehicles with a navi gation system see Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section of this manual For vehicles without navigation system see your NISSAN dealer 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation System if so equipped sisse 4 4 How to use the touch screen ssesuss 4 5 How to use the BACK button 4 4 7 How to use the MENU button 000 4 7 THD button sss 4 11 RearView Monitor if so equi
492. to return to the previous Screen POIs powered by Google Google Weather amp Send To Car Voice LHA2253 HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON For more information about the POIs Powered by Google Google Send To Car Traffic Information and Weather features see the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual For more information about the Voice Com mands key see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section To select and or adjust several functions fea tures and modes that are available for your ve hicle 1 Press the MENU button 2 Select the Settings key Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 SETTINGS Bluetooth LHA2248 3 Select the desired item Audio For audio setup refer to Audio system in this section Navigation Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Phone amp Bluetooth For information regarding the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System in this section For information regarding Bluetooth audio see Bluetooth streaming audio with Navigation System in this section 4 8 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SYSTEM SETUP Display Clock Settings Language Touchscreen Click System Beeps LHA2249 System Select the Syste
493. to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve hicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 5 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 4 WRS0256 REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the v
494. tor LHA2328 Backing up behind a projecting object The position C is shown farther than the position in the display However the position C is actually at the same distance as the position amp The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to 4 14 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Speed Sens Vol AUX Vol OFF 3 Gor or 07 J 36 J Brightness Contrast Clock Adjust LHA2254 Without Navigation System ADJUSTING THE SCREEN The procedure for adjusting the quality of the screen differs depending on the type of screen present on the vehicle For vehicles without Navigation System lh 2 Press the ENTER SETTING button Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to highlight the Brightness or Contrast key Press the ENTER SETTING button 4 Adjust the level using the TUNE SCROLL knob and then press the ENTER SETTING button to apply the adjustment Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving DISPLAY SETUP Brightness Very Bright Display Mode i Automatic 9 moves v sero Direction LHA1482 With Navigation System For vehicles with Navigation System 1 a fF Oo N Press the MENU button Select the Settings key Select the System key Select the Display key Touch the Brightness ke
495. towing capacity from Tow ing Load Specification chart 9 200 Ib 4 173 kg 7 100 Ib 3 220 kg GVWR 6 200 Ib 2 812 kg GVW 900 Ib 408 kg Available for tongue king pin weight 15 100 Ib 6 848 kg 6 200 Ib 2 812 kg 8 900 Ib 4 036 kg GCWR GVW Capacity available for towing 900 Ib 408 kg Available tongue weight 8 900 Ib 4 036 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob tain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 1096 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings Technical and consumer information 9 27 TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION Towing load specification chart with tow package short wheel base wo cc SV Maximum Towing 9 500 Ib 9 400 Ib 9 200 Ib 9 400 Ib 9 300 Ib 9 300 Ib 9 300 Ib 9 100 Ib caen dn dass i
496. ts if so equipped D Ef For additional information refer to Interior light in the Instruments and controls section in this manual Using the panic alarm LPD0211 If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 21 button on the keyfob for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time The panic alarm stops when ithas run for a period of time or any button is pressed on the keyfob 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0262 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the keyfob NOTE If you change the horn beep and light flash feature with the keyfob the display screen if so equipped will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode Use the keyfob to return to the pre vious mode and re enable the display Screen control To deactivate Press and hold the and d buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feat
497. tton as described in the See 5 speed automatic transmission charts below to activate various features of the fluid in the Maintenance and do it automatic anti glare rearview mirror yourself section Type A e If the E UE Push and hold Feature TOR u t peg iki enor D Push button again for about 1 sec mal range stop the vehicle as soon as button for about ond to xhisnge settings safely possible Have the vehicle z 1 d display toggl off checked by a NISSAN dealer Contin EELE TELA ued operation of the vehicle may seri 2 bi ba Ms grerenetestor dg ously damage the transmission ogee ono Compass zone can be changed to 11 seconds correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode Type B Push and hold Feature the N Push button again for about 1 sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off amp seconds Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode Instruments and controls 2 9 t WICO0904 Type A COMPASS DISPLAY Pushthe or button for about 1 sec ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the compass direction display on or off The display will indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading N North E East S South W West 2 10 Instruments and controls Pa Merne N N LIC1487 Type B If the d
498. ture control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger s tem perature Adjust the temperature dial to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution fan speed and A C on off are also controlled automatically Avisible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Press the defroster control button GY to turn the system on The indicator light in the button will illuminate 2 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows turn the manual fan control to the maximum position As soon as possible after the windshield is clean press the AUTO button to return to the auto mode e Whenthe control is activated the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to op erate until the fan control is turned OFF the vehicle is shut off or the A C button is used to turn off the compressor even if an air flow button other than Y is selected This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The air recirculation mode auto matically turns off allowing
499. ty SAE 80W 90 8 Rear final drive oil 4 1 4 pt 3 1 2 pt 2 0 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic 75W 140 or API GL 5 synthetic gear oil Viscosity SAE 75W 140 9 Windshield washer fluid shared between 1 1 4 gal 1 gal 4 5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or equivalent front and rear wipers 4 8 4 b 6 WE 8 9 9 2 If Genuine NISSAN For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section Matic ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Genuine NISSAN Matic J AFT will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN UM vehicle limited warranty DEXRON VI type ATF may also be used Available in nae USA through a NISSAN dealer For further details see Air conditioner specification label in this section Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability and may damage the transfer which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty For further details see Changi ing engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section For hot climates Viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0 C 32 See a NISSAN dealer fol
500. uch fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new ve hicle limited warranty If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 596 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve hicles If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage 9 4 Technical and consumer information E 15 fuel E 15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15 fuel ethanol and 8596 unleaded gasoline E 15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E 15 fuel Do not use E 15 in your vehicle U S gov ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens ing pumps to be identified with small square orange and black label with the common abbre viation or the appropriate percentage for that region E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used
501. udden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury The Utili track channel system allows you to move tie down clamps in the bed to the best location to secure a load The tie down cleats must be installed so the clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail If the tie down cleat is not seated in the notches it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be properly tightened The bolt in the center of the cleat must be tightened hand tight 20 40 in Ibs Check the tightness of the tie down cleat peri odically during a trip to make sure the center bolt has not become loose Install the tie down cleat as follows 1 Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed Properly store the channel protectors 2 Loosen the center bolt completely 90 LTIO103 3 Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicu lar to the channel as shown Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90 and slide it to the de sired location LTIO104 4 Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom fully seat into the channel detents Technical and consumer information 9 17 WT10124 5 There should be no gap between the bottom of the cleat and the top of the channel Tighten the center bolt hand tight 20 40 in lbs 9 18 Technical and consumer information LTIO106 A CAUTION Install only one cleat per sec
502. uid temperature gallge o 4 tae esc re Pe ash dote d e 2 8 AUXjack ee o n ns 4 51 4 58 B Batterye z k lt 2 0 ue teow ew demus 8 14 Charge warning light 2 15 Before starting the engine 5 11 Belt See drive belt 8 16 Block heater Engife 3 ae aa digg mae Ge See s 5 39 Bluetooth audio 4 66 4 68 Bluetooth hands free phone system Gee ea ee ee eed 4 83 4 98 4 109 Booster seats soa nu kare eee 1 43 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 33 Brake fluid 2 or eee 8 12 Brake light See stop light 8 29 Brake system ee ee 5 32 Brake warning light 2 14 Brake wear indicators 2 20 8 21 Parking brake operation 5 20 Self adjusting brakes 8 21 Brakes e nisse gad hea Sx de 8 21 Break in schedule i 5 22 Brightness contrast button 4 11 Brightness control Instrument panel 2 33 Bulb check instrument panel 2 13 Bulb replacement less 8 29 c Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants llle 9 2 Cargo light switch 0 2 34 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 13 Car phone or CBradio 4 83 CD care and cleaning 4 71 CD player See audio system 4 45 4 50 4 56 Check tire pressure sees 2 25 Child restraints 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 28 Precautions on
503. uine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior Mats should be main tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn 2 LAIOO09 Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes two driver s side front floor mat brackets and one passenger s side front floor mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The driver s side floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the passenger s side has one grommet hole Position each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while centering the mat in the floorwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual A WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debr
504. umidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The C amp gt mode automati cally turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 Bi level heating The bi level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets 1 Press the VS button to the OFF position The indicator light on the s amp gt button will go off 2 Press the 7s air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind shield D 1 Press the air flow control button 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position e Whenthe position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the 4 C button will not come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the ve hicle is shut off the fan is turned off or the A C button is used to turn off the compres sor even if the air flow control dial is turned de P m to a position other than the
505. ur vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver type frame mounted hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and gooseneck trailers can also be installed on your vehicle Contact a professional supplier of towing equip ment to purchase and have a 5th wheel or goose neck hitch installed 9 30 Technical and consumer information A WARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than
506. ure does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered HOOD m 7 AY L1 2 SZ i SESS s IOLO LPD0244 D Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel The hood will spring up slightly Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood When closing the hood lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place A WARNING e Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 FUEL FILLER DOOR LPD0263 FUEL FILLER CAP A WARNING e Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve need
507. uring the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Technical and consumer information 9 37 Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This com bination will help stabilize the vehicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes 2 When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area 3 Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency 9 38 Technical and consumer information Increase your following distance
508. using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock Q Se eee G 3 4 XH MENU CAMERA Or Orr phat e ME i zi TUNE AUDIO LHA2516 1 Display screen 2 button 3 MAP button 4 NAV button 4 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems o x Oo o MENU button BACK button TUNE knob AUDIO button 41D brightness control button 9 Power button VOL volume control knob 10 CAMERA button For information regarding the Navigation system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual For information regarding the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System control button see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System in this section When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display These keys can be selected by touching the screen HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN A CAUTION The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass screen breaks do not touch it Doing so could result in an injury To clean the display nev
509. ve 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions Starting and driving 5 33 When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving 5 34 Starting and driving ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP ABLS SYSTEM ABLS system uses automatic braking to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to the wheel on the same axle with more trac tion The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping wheel which helps redirect power to the other wheel On4WD models the ABLS system operates in both 4H and 4LO modes If 4WD mode is engaged the ABLS system operates for both drive axles On 2WD vehicles the ABLS system operates on the drive axle only The ABLS system is always ON In some conditions the system may automatically turn the ABLS system off If the system is automatically turned off normal brake func tion will continue ABLS will function even when the VDC system is turned OFF The ABLS does not operate if both wheels on a drive axle are slipping A
510. ved properly Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted f you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them fa command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice f you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response 4 86 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press and hold the 4 button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session Whenever the VR ses sion is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steerin
511. vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel vehicle FFV your vehicle is designed to use E 85 Fuel Ethanol Regular unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels com bined A CAUTION e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels and tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 mi 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the Break in schedule information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fol low these recommendations for the future reli ability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result
512. ver 1 year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg should remain in a rear facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward facing child re straint with a harness Refer to the manufactur er s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve hicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for instal lation and use LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi mum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness equipped forward facing child re straint NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit For a seat belt to fit properly the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top middle portion of the shoulder The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul der The lap b
513. ver use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Besure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood 3 Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment WDI0452 LDI0381 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse B 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 s S Je LDI0618 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Besure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the glove box to access the fuse box cover 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself 3 Pull t
514. veryone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident Always replace and adjust them prop erly if they have been removed for any reason If the head restraints are removed for any reason they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop Properly secure all cargo to help pre vent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 LRS0341 LRS0342 Folding the front passenger s seatback flat if so equipped To fold the front passenger s seatback flat for extra storage length when transporting long items Slide the seat to the rear most position Then lift up on the recline lever located on the outside of the seat and fold the seatback forward as far as it will go
515. w and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is nota cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE FFV FUEL RECOMMENDATION if so equipped Your vehicle is designed to use E 85 Fuel Etha nol Regular unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined U S government regulations require Fuel Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region A CAUTION Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage or a loss of vehicle performance Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will cause damage to the three way catalyst General information This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles FFV only FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only cov ers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuel vehicles A CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door la bel can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel etha nol and 15 unleaded gasoline AWA
516. w should face the rear of the vehicle The arrows should face downward 4 Insertthe first filter into the housing and slide it over to the right Insert the second filter into the housing 5 Install the filter cover 6 Install the glove box door 7 Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper replace the blades A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself WDIO0408 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove 1 o 3 Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place
517. ward arrow symbol respectively in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds Faceplate feature only If media is in activated MENU mode the NAVI GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu If display control menu is on the NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu ENTER In MENU mode press the ENTER button to se lect MENU items In the display menu press the ENTER button to select items for modification as per the on Screen instructions MENU If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU button is pressed the DVD menu will appear on the screen Use the Navigation Keys to navigate within the menu and use ENTER to select the item Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY mode TITLE Remote control only Press the TITLE button to return the DVD media to the title of the DVD Press the TITLE button again to return to the previous stop point and play BACK Remote control only Press the BACK button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu SUBTITLE Remote control only Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle selection menu Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle through each available subtitle AUDIO Remote control only Press the AUDIO button to call up the audio menu Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle through each available audio track ANGLE Remo
518. wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones Ifthe hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must
519. weather driving 5 Driving with automatic transmission 5 Precautions when starting and driving E Economy f el xu dass E xU 5 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock EYE METRE EE 5 Electronic locking rear differential E Lock system Switch i oz suos xo ed Foe Res 2 Emission control information label 9 Emission control system warranty 9 Engine Before starting the engine 5 Blockheater 05 5 Capacities and recommended fuel l bricants 24246 260045 04 Changing engine coolant Changing engine oil 8 Changing engine oil filter 8 Checking engine coolant level Checking engine oillevel Engine compartment check locations 4 4 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine cooling system 8 7 Engin olll i uie yt ae ERR emen s 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 6 Engine oil viscosity 9 7 Engine serial number 9 11 Engine specifications 9 8 Starting the engine 5 12 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 7 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Erter DUTTON s soa ie spo uon E GG wae BA ee 4 4 Event data recorders 9 42 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 Extended storage switch 8 25 F Flashers S
520. wee 2 45 Glove box locks se oo or 2 45 Grocery hooks s eom hoe Ro oes 2 50 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth 4 83 4 98 4 109 Hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 30 Headlight control switch 2 30 HHeadlights somme 8 27 Headphones See NISSAN mobile entertainment system sacs oboe eo tone m o od 4 76 Heated seats ee ee 2 34 Heater Heater and air conditioner CONOS 4 6 hae Be 4 17 4 25 4 32 Heater operation 4 19 4 26 4 33 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 58 Hood release llle 3 11 HOM 2 saan ma mom E Gore koe Re UA 2 34 l Ignition switch a aa ee eee 5 9 Immobilizer system 2 26 3 2 5 11 Important vehicle information label 9 11 In cabin microfilter s 8 18 Increasing fueleconomy 5 23 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2er 2 13 Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 16 Inside mirror xem ee a 3 16 Instrument brightness control 2 33 Instrument panel lesse 0 6 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 33 Interior light is see or RR 2 56 iPod Player ck mmm ond 4 62 4 64 ISOFIX child restraints 1 28 J Jump starting esis iom ak Vale os gE ie a 6 8 K Key i soo ae eee moo a eS 3 2 Keyfob battery rep
521. will also illuminate when the cargo lamp switch is in the ON position A CAUTION Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time otherwise the battery will go dead 1 Start the engine 2 Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired depending on the temperature The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off A WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat Use of the seat heater by such people could result in se rious injury A CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth e When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or
522. with washer fluid concen trates at full strength Some methyl al cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield washer fluid reser voir Do not use the windshield washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened Ifthe vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself NOTE Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no start conditions such as 1 Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running Phone chargers GPS DVD players etc 2 Vehicle is not driven regularly and or only driven short distances In these cases the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health A WARNING Do not expose the battery to flames an electrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive
523. wo conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modification not ex pressly approved by the party respon sible for compliance could void the us ers authority to operate the equipment Starting and driving 5 5 For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence include interference that may cause undesired operation of the de vice 3 The term IC before the radio certifi cation number only signifies that In dustry Canada technical specifications were met AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER A WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering ma neuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle loss of control could result in a 5 6 Starting and driving collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all time
524. wrench and insert it into the channel Position the end stopper to the desired lo cation on the channel so the nubs on the bottom of the end stopper fully seat into the channel detents Tighten the bolt on the center of the end stopper with the provided wrench LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle s warranty Technical and consumer information 9 21 TRUCK CAMPER LOADING INFORMATION CREW CAB MODELS Crew Cab short wheel base models should not be used to carry a slide in camper KING CAB MODELS This information is provided for you to properly install a slide in camper and is based on
525. xit function coenae sr e REST EE 3 27 System operation eec usted ev ew beter ewe 3 28 KEYS 3 WPD0128 1 Two master keys black with transpon der chip if so equipped and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side 2 Valet key black with transponder chip if so equipped 3 Key number plate 4 Transponder chip if so equipped A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS if so equipped You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for all the locks The valet key cannot be used for the console box lock the bedside storage compartment lock or the glove box lock if so equipped To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone give them the valet key only Never leave these keys in th
526. y Redialing lt name number gt The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it available otherwise the num ber being redialed will be displayed Call Back Speakthis command to dial the number of the last incoming call The system will display Calling back name number The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it available otherwise the num ber being called back will be displayed 4 104 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems answer cat JReiect con LHA2293 RECEIVING A CALL When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle s Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System the call information is displayed on either the vehicle information display or both the vehicle information display and he control panel display Press the amp button to accept the call Press the 4 button to reject the call Phone 2054 Fal dot UL E Cd Transfercal 1 Say Command LHA2294 DURING A CALL While a call is active press the amp button to access additional options Speak one of the fol lowing commands numbers Speak numbers and then say Send or say Correction to change the numbers entered e Mute On or Mute Off Speak the com mand to mute or unmute the system e Transfer Call Speak this command to transfer the call to the handset To transfer the call back from the handset t
527. y and adjust the level to the desired setting Do not adjust the display of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 OPERATING TIPS A CAUTION e Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discoloration To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with a di luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth e Do not damage the camera as the moni tor screen may be adversely affected When the shift selector is shifted to R Re verse the monitor screen automatically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard It may take some time until the RearView Monitor is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R Reverse Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear View Monitor screen is displayed com pletely When the shift selector is returned to a position other than R Reverse it may take some time until the screen changes Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display ob jects This is not a malfunction When strong light directly enters the cam era objects may not be displayed clearly Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The scre
528. ying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer Have the belt checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide SPARK PLUGS E E SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace platinum tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service platinum tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re gapping Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones A WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 AIR CLEANER WDIO0712 The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Mainte nance Guide To remove the air cleaner filter Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward 2 Remove the air cleaner filter 3 Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous ing and the cover with a damp cloth 8 18 Maintenance

2014 Nissan Titan

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents